Home

UHF User Manual - Zurich Instruments

Contents

1. V 00 Dol Y1 0 006 Ere iti 0 Figure 4 17 Demodulator settling time and inaccuracy The plot area keeps the memory and display of the last 100 sweeps by default This can be changed to any value in the History sub tab where it is also possible to select a subset of the sweeps that are displayed or kept in memory Colors can be changed for each displayed curve so that the display becomes very versatile to generate high quality plots Note The Sweeper can get stuck whenever it does not receive the expected data samples A common mistake is to select to display demodulator data without enabling the data transfer of the associated demodulator in the Lock in tab Note Once a sweep is performed the sweeper stores all data from the enabled demodulators and auxiliary inouts always even when they are not displayed immediately in the plot area These data can be accessed at a later point in time simply by choosing the corresponding signal display settings Input Channel Functional Elements Table 4 30 Sweeper tab Control sub tab Run Stop Runs the sweeper continuously UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 146 4 9 Sweeper Tab Copy From Range Seueur akes over start and stop value from the plot area Start unit numeric value Start value of the sweep parameter The unit adapts according to the selected sweep para
2. Oscilloscope Router a Figure 3 1 Tutorial simple loop setup LAN connection shown LabOne Lan an Lan Lan Lan Data Server Web Server User Interface Ethernet Note This tutorial is for all UHF units with lock in capability irrespective of which particular option set is installed Note that if the UHF MF multi frequency option is installed there is slight difference in the test signal generation procedure section 3 1 3 Connect the cables as described above Make sure that the UHF unit is powered on and then connect the UHF directly by USB to your host computer or by Ethernet to your local area network LAN where the host computer resides Start the LabOne User Interface UHF from the Windows start menu The LabOne Data Server UHF and the LabOne Web Server are automatically started and run in the background UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 56 3 1 Tutorial Simple Loop 3 1 3 Generate the Test Signal Perform the following steps in order to generate a 30 MHz signal of 0 5 V peak amplitude on Signal Output 1 1 Change the frequency value of oscillator 1 Lock in tab Oscillators section to 30 MHz click on the field enter 30 000 000 or 30M in short and press either lt TAB gt or lt ENTER gt on your keyboard to activate the setting 2 In the Signal Outputs section right hand side on the Lock in tab set the Range pull down to 1 5 V the Offset to O V and the amplitude to 500 mV for
3. _ tenath pts 84006 You should now observe a spectrum like the one shown inthe screen capture below Allamplitudes are measured in peak values The center carrier frequency and the sideband frequencies should have half of the generated amplitudes i e about 0 5 V and 50 mV respectively This is due to the voltage divider effect from the combination of the 50 output port impedance and the 50 Q input termination impedance The additional 0 5 factor for the two sidebands is due to the fact that the original AM modulation signal power is shared between two sidebands UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 69 3 3 Tutorial Amplitude Modulation Amplitude Amplitude Vj AE 0 5024V A 0 4523V seevezseees 80 1369mV 1 9900kHz i 10 100MHz 4 A 200kHz Pki 10 4 Frequency MHz Figure 3 14 Generated AM signal with UHFLI 3 3 4 AM Demodulation Result If you look at the Demod Freg column under the Lock in tab you will see that the demodulation frequencies of all three frequency components are stated clearly 10 MHz on demodulator 1 10 1 MHz on demodulator 2 and 9 9 MHz on demodulator 3 You can now read out simultaneously the magnitude and the phase R O or X Y of the carrier component on demodulator 1 and the upper and lower sideband components on demodulator 2 and 3 respectively The measurement result is shown under the Numeric tab as shown in Figure 3 15 UHF
4. 1 Ensure that the USB cable is properly connected 2 Iry power cycling the device 3 Click the Refresh button Program the firmware of the connected device Click the Program button to check the version of the current firmware and install the new firmware on the device UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 40 1 6 Upgrading the Lock In Amplifier Firmware ris UHF Firrnware Upgrade Utility Ef N Hi A Versions available i Fe FPG4 tev 22095 USE rev 1 30 a EN e Ai Firmware rew 22913 Power rew 130619 Zurich Device DEW2009 Refresh Uric Instruments Emt Overall progress Current task TT TTT Tt ty Ye Action log Restarting the device done Uploading the flash core success Checking firmware needs update Checking bitstream needs update Checking factory firmware needs update Checking factory bitstream Figure 1 25 Verifying the UHF firmware version Important After clicking Program and the upgrade is finished it is always necessary to power cycle the UHF to resume normal operation even if the firmware was previously up to date UHF Firmware Upgrade Utility Ea i w 7 All the internal firmwares are up to date Please power cycle the device to resume normal operation Figure 1 26 Pop up Box indicating successful installation of the new firmware UHF Firmware Upgrade Utility ese _ All the internal firmwares are already up to date no re programmin
5. 1 oscilloscope optional 1 BNC T piece optional 1 resonator for the PLL tutorial UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 55 3 1 Tutorial Simple Loop 3 1 Tutorial Simple Loop 3 1 1 3 1 2 Note This tutorial is applicable to all UHF Instruments No specific options are required N B ifthe UHF MF multi frequency option is installed then some of the required settings will vary from those indicated below Goals and Requirements This tutorial is for people with no or little prior experience with Zurich Instruments lock in amplifiers By using a very basic measurement setup this tutorial shows the most fundamental working principles of an UHF instrument and the LabOne UI in a step by step hands on approach There are no special requirements for this tutorial Preparation In this tutorial you are asked to generate a signal with the UHFLI Instrument and measure that generated signal with the same instrument This is done by connecting Signal Output 1 to Signal Input 1 with a short BNC cable ideally lt 30 cm Alternatively it is possible to connect the generated signal at Signal Output 1 to an oscilloscope by using a T piece and an additional BNC cable Figure 3 1 displays a sketch of the hardware setup UH Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Aux Output 0000 Front Panel Back Panel USB TriggerOut Trigger In Aux In ZCtrl 1 D
6. 4096 Vertical Channel 1 Signal Input 1 Hg Min 100 0r Max 100 0n Channel 2 Signal Input 2 T O gt Man Min 1 0 Max 1 0 eB Avg Filter None db b B Lin Averages 1 R Vertical Axis Groups Signal Type Channel Scope voi Wave V _ Scope Chl Wave BB scope Ch2 Wave Drop signal here for new group Drop signal group here to remove Device dev2044 Session 25 ziDAQ setInt dev2044 scopes O single 1 000000000 side bar status bar main area control tabs Figure 4 1 LabOne User Interface default view Figure 4 1 shows the default screen after a new measurements session has been started The appearance of the UI is by default divided in two tab rows each containing a tab structure that allows to access the different settings and tools Depending on display size and application tab rows can be freely added and deleted with the control elements on the right hand side of each tab bar Similarly the individual tabs can be deleted or added by selecting app icons from the left side bar Asimple click on an icon adds the requested tab to the active tab row alternatively the icon can be dragged to the tab bar where it Supposed to be placed Moreover tab positions can simply be changed by dragging them with the mouse within a row or across rows to the new location Further items are highlighted in Figure 4 2 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 93 4 1 User Interface Overview appicons e
7. Select a Preset Enabled Demods R Enabled Demods Cartesian Enabled Demods Polar Manual 2 F aA tie hy IE iHi Demodulator 1 Frequency tl Frequency MHz Signal Channel xt I Signal Display Groups Feij m fe Frequency A dev2006 demods 0 sample Freq Drop signal here to add a new group Device dev2006 Session 1 ziDAQ setDouble dev2006 oscs 1 freq 3 0004e 007 ESTE PL Pio mop Box RUB caL CF Ovi ovo PL s B Figure 3 7 LabOne enabling external reference mode At this point it is worth noting that the external reference signal is never used directly for demodulation Instead the frequency and phase of the external reference signal is mapped to one of the internal oscillators first through an internal phase locked loop This internal oscillator can then serve as a reference for any of the demodulators This mapping procedure is implemented with an automatic bandwidth adjustment that assures optimum operation over the whole frequency range for a broad variety of signal qualities in terms of frequency stability as well as the signal to noise ratio Over the course of automatic adjustment the Low Pass Filter bandwidth of the associated demodulators 4 or 8 usually ramps down until a final value is reached after a few seconds The indicated bandwidth also marks an upper limit to the bandwidth of the phase locked loop that does the mapping of the external signal to the internal oscillator The followi
8. percent value Trigger reference position relative to the plot window Default is 50 which results ina reference point in the middle of the acquired data Delay s numeric value Trigger position relative to reference A positive delay results in less data being acquired before the trigger point a negative delay results in more data being acquired before the trigger point ON OFF Enable segmented scope recording This allows Segments 1 to 32 68 number of segments This functionality requires the UHF DIG option Shown Segment integer value Displays the number of recorded segments Shown Segment integer value Displays the number of triggered events since last Start UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 134 for full bandwidth recording of scope shots with a minimum dead time between individual shots This functionality requires the UHF DIG option Specifies the number of segments to be recorded in device memory The maximum scope shot size is given by the available memory divided by the 4 6 Scope Tab For the Math sub tab please see Table 4 7 in the section called Cursors and Math UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 130 4 7 Software Trigger Tab 4 7 Software Trigger Tab 4 7 1 4 7 2 The software trigger is one of the powerful time domain measurement tools as introduced in Section 4 1 2 and is available in all UHF Instruments Features m Scope and Plotter like ti
9. 2 1 Features Spectroscope SW trigger Software Features Web based high speed user interface with multi instrument control Data server with multi client Support API for C LabVIEW MATLAB Python based instrument programming UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 48 2 2 Front Panel Tour 2 2 Front Panel Tour The front panel BNC connectors and control LEDs are arranged as shown in Figure 2 2 and listed in Table 2 1 U H Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s eX VIS 4 Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Gi A a 1 2 1 2 1 2 G ver ver a n j n j G j M oO 00 0000 50Q 1MQ 500 In 500 2 5V 1kQ 5V 500 10V Zu ri C h max 3 5V 8dBm Out 509 3 3V TTL n Sir m e nts alb llb lele dlh k bo lk k In No Figure 2 2 UHF Instrument front panel Table 2 1 UHF Instrument front panel description A Signalinput1 single ended UHF input Signal Input 1 this red LED indicates that the input signal saturates the A D Over converter and therefore the input range must be increased or the signal must be attenuated C Signal Input 2 single ended UHF input Signallnput 2 this red LED indicates that the input signal saturates the A D Over converter and therefore the input range must be increased or the signal must be attenuated Signal Output 1 single ended UHF output Output 1 this blue LED indicates that the signal output is actively dri
10. 4 1 User Interface Overview CSV CSV Values of the current result table are saved as a text file into the download folder Link Provides a LabOne Net Link to use the data in tools like Excel Matlab etc Help Opens the LabOne User Interface help Note For calculation of the standard deviation the corrected sample standard deviation is used as N defined by H a with a total of N samples x and an arithmetic average X i Tree Sub Tab The Numeric tab and Plotter tab are able to display so many different types of signal that anumber of different options are provided to access them One of them is the Tree sub tab that allows essentially to access all streamed measurement data in a hierarchical structure by checking the boxes of the signal that should be displayed Scope Xx Numeric x Plotter x AddRow x Control Tree Settings Math gt Demodulator 1 X All Amplitude mV Device 2044 Arithmetic Units Cartesian AU Cartesian 1 AU Cartesian 2 is Arithmetic Units Polar AU Polar 1 AU Polar 2 Auxiliary Outputs Lin Aux Out 1 Aux Out 2 Aux Out 3 Aux Out 4 2 Boxcars Y2 0 0000000 V m i A 0 0000000 V Time s Ee Tree sub tab Figure 4 3 Tree sub tab in Plotter tab Table 4 8 Tree description Selection Filter Regular expression Create a filter to define which streaming nodes are selected The View Filter presents a number of presets that can serve as examples View Fil
11. Clock Clock 10 MHz Internal Out Quartz Rubidium Figure 5 6 Clock routing UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 211 5 6 Device Self Calibration Procedure 5 6 Device Self Calibration Procedure The device requires a Self calibration after a short warm up period to ensure operation according to specifications During this self calibration process components of the sensitive analog front end are calibrated to account for temperature variations and drift It is worth noting that self calibration has nothing to do with the device calibration which is done at the manufacturer site The self calibration lasts about one second and only applies a fine tuning The first self calibration after warm up is executed automatically Any further self calibration needs to be manually executed by the user The self calibration process can be executed by means of clicking the Run button of the Auto Calibration in the Device tab of the user interface The user can disable the calibration procedure completely if necessary This can be done by changing the Enabled button of the Auto Calibration in the device tab If this flag is disabled no calibration is executed after warm up time The default self calibration procedure can be divided into three different states which are also indicated by the CAL flag in the footer of the user interface The CAL flag can be either yellow gray off or red m Yellow The yellow CAL flag ind
12. Figure 4 8 LabOne Ul Numeric tab The numeric tab can be deployed to display the demodulated signal phase frequency as well as the signal levels at the auxiliary inputs and auxiliary outputs By default the user can display the UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 120 4 4 Numeric Tab 4 4 3 demodulated data either in polar coordinates R or in Cartesian coordinates X Y which can be toggled using the presets To display other measurement quantities as available from any of the presets simply click on the tree tab besides the preset tab The desired display fields can be selected under each demodulator s directory tree structure Functional Elements Table 4 15 Numeric tab Presets sub tab Select a Preset Demods Polar Shows R and Phase of all demodulators Enabled Shows R and Phase of enabled demodulators Demods Polar Shows X and Y of all demodulators Enabled Demods Shows X and Y of enabled demodulators Cartesian Shows R of all demodulators Shows amplitude of all boxcars PID Errors Shows error of all PID Arithmetic Units Shows output of all Cartesian and polar arithmetic units Manual If additional signals are added or removed the active preset gets manual For the Tree sub tab please see Table 4 8 in the section called Tree Sub Tab Table 4 16 Numeric tab Settings sub tab Name text label Name of the selected plot s The default name can be changed to reflect the measur
13. EVV Y J j LF V V VY Y V Y r W y Yy y VJ y J Y y y iF y y y y y y y y y y y y E ig J i 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 14 7 a a Time us pS Lin JFS heli Figure 3 6 Reference signal viewed with the internal scope UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 62 3 2 Tutorial External Reference 3 2 3 Note Alternatively the Scope mode Frequency Domain FFT instead of Time Domain can be used to check the frequency content of the signal Set the scale settings automatic for the X axis and logarithmic scale dB for the Y axis for convenient viewing The averaging filter can be set Exp Moving Avg to reduce the noise floor on the display Activate the External Reference Mode After putting back the cable as indicated in Figure 3 4 the external reference mode can be activated and output the regenerated signal of interest The following additional settings have to be adjusted Table 3 8 Settings acquire the reference signal boen fosse fe offset doy o o oo ookin Josse e Amplitude v peen paa p feee Lookin Demodulator 1 fene fn In general Demodulator 4 and Demodulator 8 can be set to the external reference mode to track the external reference at Signal Input 1 and Signal Input 2 respectively The external reference can come from the Sig In 1 and 2 Trig 1 and 2 in the front Trig 3 and 4 in the back or Aux In 3 and 4 in the back The 4 Auxiliary Outputs can also be c
14. Hz 14 1M Input Demodulator R 8 x 3 Setpoint V 30 00m Error V 6 459m 4 TC Mode P vv s 00 I V V s 0 000 D V V s 0 000 Output Output 2 Amplitude 8 X Center V 500 0m Out 1 067 Shift 567m Upper Limit V 1 000 Lower Limit V 0 000 Numeric x PLL x Plotter x Add Row x DD bh BB Presets Tree Settings Recording Horizontal Window Length 20s Demodulator 8 R Amplitude mV 0 000000V uy A 0 000000V 9 3 F Ee cf Time s Figure 3 22 PID step response observation using the Plotter 3 4 Once the above condition is met then set to the value of 1 5Tou Toy is the delta time between the overshoot and the undershoot of the step response Increase gradually until the error value gets very close to 0 One can slightly decrease the P value by 50 to 80 if PID becomes slightly unstable One can potentially set D to 1 4 of although it is not necessary and sometimes it might not even bring any improvement UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 78 3 5 Tutorial Automatic Gain Control 5 Check loop response again by applying a step response like in Step 2 Adjust mainly the P value accordingly for fine tuning Note The set point can be manually toggled to create the step response condition Config x Aux x Lockin x PID x AddRow x Lock in PID 3 2 Enable g Rate Hz 14 1M Input Demodulator R 8 X Setpoint V 2 Jooom Error
15. L L 1 1 I I 1 L 1 1 I 1 es ee em I 1 P SOES a es ee oe Frequency Hz Figure 5 5 Input noise with 1MQ input impedance Input noise amplitude depends on several parameters and in particular on the frequency and the setting for the input range The input noise is lower for smaller input ranges and it is recommended to use small ranges especially for noise measurements Only the noise with DC input coupling is shown here as the input noise with AC coupling is the same as long as the frequency is above the AC cutoff frequency see Table 5 5 The corner frequency of the 1 f noise is in the range of 100 kHz and the white noise floor is below 8 nV V Hz for the smallest input range 210 Zurich Instruments Revision 28900 UHF User Manual 5 5 Clock 10 MHz 5 5 Clock 10 MHz A 10 MHz clock input and output is provided for synchronization with other instruments The figure explains the internal routing of the different clock signals An internal clock generation unit receives a 10 MHz clock reference and generates all necessary device internal sampling clocks The clock reference either comes from the internal quartz Rubidium oscillator or from an external clock source connected to the Clock 10 MHz In connector The user can define if the clock is taken from the internal or external source The Clock 10 MHz Out connector always provides the 10 MHz clock of the internal quartz Rubidium oscillator Clock Source
16. Lock in Tab This tab is the main lock in amplifier control panel Instruments with UHF MF multi frequency option installed are referred to Section 4 3 4 2 1 Features Control for 2 separate lock in units with 4 demodulators each m Auto ranging scaling arbitrary input units for both input channels Control for 2 oscillators m Range setting for signal inputs and signal outputs m Flexible choice of reference source trigger options and data transfer rates 4 2 2 Description The lock in tab is the main control center of the instrument and open after start up by default Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 10 App icon and short description Lock in Quick overview and access to all the settings and properties for signal generation and demodulation The Lock in tab see Figure 4 5 is horizontally divided into two identical sections The upper section is related to Signal Input 1 and Signal Output 1 and the lower section to Signal Input 2 and Signal Output 2 i e the main BNC connectors on the front side of the instrument The two input channels and output channels are identical in all aspects Config x Device XxX Aux X Lock in x AddRow x Signal Inputs Oscillators Demodulators Signal Outputs Reference Frequencies Input AFPR FIA Sener e Input 1 LLH Mode Frequency Hz Mode Osc Harm Demod Freq Hz o
17. Software Installation Please ensure you download the correct architecture 82 bit 64 bit of the LabOne installer The uname command can be used in order to determine which architecture you are using by running uname m in a command line terminal If the command outputs x686 the 32 bit version of the LabOne package is required if it displays x86 64 the 64 bit version is required Linux LabOne Installation Please proceed with the installation ina command line shell as follows 1 Extract the LabOne tarball in a temporary directory tar xzvf LabOneLinux lt arch gt lt release gt lt revision gt tar gz 2 Navigate into the extracted directory cd LabOneLinux lt arch gt lt release gt lt revision gt 3 Run the install script with administrator rights and proceed through the guided installation using the default installation path if possible sudo bash install sh The install script lets you choose between the following three modes m lType a to install the Data Server program documentation and APIs m Type u to install udev support only necessary if HF2 Instruments will be used with this LabOne installation not for the UHF Lock in Amplifier m lyope ENTER to install both options a and u 4 Test the installation by starting the Data Server administrator rights required and the Web Server sudo ziDataServer startWebServerUHF and entering the address 127 0 0 1 8006 in a web browser to start the L
18. Sweeper Tab 4 9 1 4 9 2 The Sweeper is a highly versatile measurement tool available in all UHF Instruments The Sweeper allows to scan one variable over a defined range and at the same time detect certain parameters of the continuously streamed data Sweeping oscillator frequencies for example allows to turn the instrument frequency response analyzer FRA a well known class of instruments Features m Full featured parametric sweep tool for frequency phase shift output amplitude DC output voltages etc m Full multi wave support for simultaneous display of data from different sources Demodulators PIDs Boxcar Arithmetic Unit m Different application Modes e g Frequency response analyzer Bode plots m different sweep options single continuous run stop bidirectional binary m Persistent display of previous sweep results overlap m Normalization of sweep m Auto bandwidth averaging and display normalization Support for Input Scaling and Input Units m Phase unwrap m Full Support of sinc filter Description The sweeper offers supports for a variety of different type of experiments where a sweep parameter is changed stepwise and numerous measurement results can be graphically displayed Start the tool by pressing the corresponding app icon in the UI side bar The Sweeper tab see Figure 4 16 is divided into a plot area on the left with the control tabs on the right Important Multiple sweeper tools ca
19. Table 5 4 Demodulator output sample rate to host computer Host Active Maximum Comments computer demodulators sample rate per connection demodulator 1 GbE 1 6 MSa s to achieve highest rates it is advised 800 kSa s to remove all other data transfer that loads the LAN USB interface it is USB 2 0 flag in the status tab from time to time when using high readout rate settings 4 400 kSa s recommended to check the sample loss 2 6 Note The sample readout rate is the rate at which demodulated samples are transferred from the Instrument to the host computer This rate has to be setto at least 2 times the signal bandwidth of the related demodulator in order to satisfy the Nyquist sampling theorem As the maximum rate is limited by the USB LAN protocol and by the performance of the host PC less maximum rate is provided for more active demodulators This table summarises the capability of the UHFLI 6 or 8 demodulators UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 198 5 1 General Specifications The maximum achievable rate requires the connection of performing up to date host computer hardware UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 199 5 2 Analog Interface Specifications 5 2 Analog Interface Specifications Table 5 5 UHF signal inputs high value 1 MQ 16 pF input A D conversion Re 12 bit 1 8 GSa s input noise amplitude gt 100 kHz 10 4 nV VHz mV range 50 Q termination Imate
20. The demodulated samples are streamed to the host computer at the Rate indicated on the left hand side In continuous mode the numerical and plotter tools are continuously receiving and display new values Trigger 3 Selects external triggering by means of the Trigger 3 connector Demodulated samples are sent to the host computer for each event defined in the Trig Mode field When edge trigger is selected the rate field is greyed out and has no meaning Note some UHF Instruments feature Trigger 1 2 on the back panel instead of Trigger 3 4 Trigger 4 Selects external triggering by means of the Trigger 4 connector Demodulated samples are sent to the host computer for each event defined in the Trig Mode field When edge trigger is selected the rate field is greyed out and has no meaning Note some UHF Instruments feature Trigger 1 2 on the back panel instead of Trigger 3 4 Trig Mode Rising Selects triggered sample acquisition mode on rising edge of the selected Trigger input Falling Selects triggered sample acquisition mode on falling edge of the selected Trigger input Both Selects triggered sample acquisition mode on both edges of the selected Trigger input High Selects continuous sample acquisition mode on high level of the selected Trigger input In this selection the sample rate field determines the frequency in which demodulated samples are sent to the host computer Low Selects continuous sample acquisition mode on low
21. To lock to the trigger signal the Lock in tab should have the following settings the goal is to lock the internal oscillator 1 to the external trigger from the AWG The frequency of oscillator 1 in the Lock in tab should now display 9 7 MHz with the green light on to indicate a lock condition Table 3 20 Settings lock oscillator 1 to external trigger 1 Then to activate the PWA function place one instance of the Boxcar tool in the LabOne web interface To display the 9 7 MHz pulse over a single period the following parameters need to be set Table 3 21 Settings activate PWA PWA Signal Input Input Signal Sig In 1 On UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 82 3 6 Tutorial PWA and Boxcar Averager Immediately one can see in the PWA a very stable and smooth peak in one pulse period The horizontal axis is shown in phase over 360 degrees to represent one period of the pulse waveform The position of the peak also indicates the precise phase delay with respect to the trigger signal In this phase representation the PWA sub divide the full 8360 degrees into 1024 bins The phase resolution is therefore about 0 35 deg for a signal of 9 7 MHz this corresponds to atime resolution of about 100 ps 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 Input PWA 1 Waveform Amplitude mV 0 0deg A0 0deg 0 0 0000v ee ee eee ee ee ee ae A 0 0000V i i i i i i i 1 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 Phase deg Figure 3
22. V 10 09m am 4 TC Mode o P V V 95 00 hvy I V V s 518 0 Scope D V V s 0 000 Output Output 2 Amplitude 8 X Center V 500 0m Out 500 0m Shift 7 63u Upper Limit V 1 000 Lower Limit V 0 000 Numeric x PLL x Plotter x Add Row x Presets Tree Settings Ux Recording jane In Out 2 Horizontal P z ngm Window Length 1min 10 ft gt Man LI D pan 0 00000V A 0 00000V 9 50 p a Time s Figure 3 23 PID step response fine tuning by trying out different responses to set points UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 79 3 6 Tutorial PWA and Boxcar Averager 3 6 Tutorial PWA and Boxcar Averager Note This tutorial is applicable to UHF Instruments having the UHF BOX Boxcar Averager option installed 3 6 1 Goals and Requirements This tutorial explains how to set up a periodic waveform analyzer PWA as well as utilize a boxcar averager for periodic signal measurement The advantages of using the PWA and the boxcar averager over a digital scope or a lock in amplification technique will be explained and demonstrated as follows The duty cycle and the signal energy that is available in the fundamental frequency scale almost linearly For example a rectangular signal pulse with 50 duty cycle has only 1 3 of the signal amplitude in the fundamental frequency And if the duty cycle is further halved then the signal in the fundamental
23. combinations of oscillator frequencies The MOD tab see Figure 4 29 is divided into two horizontal sections one for each modulation kit Config x Device XxX Aux X Lock in XxX MOD x Add Row x MOD 1 Oscillators Demodulators Generation Enable O Reference Frequencies Input Ep Low Pass Filters Henny Mode Frequency Hz Osc Harm Demod Freq Hz Signal Phase deg Order TC s Signal Output 1 Carrier AM v 10 00000000M 1v 1 10 00000000mM Sigin1l v 0 000 3 810 5u Carrier V 100 0m Sideband 1 C M 10 00000000M 2v 1 10 00000000mM Siginl v 0 000 3 810 5u Modulation V 5 000m Sideband 2 C M v 10 00000000M FACS 1 10 00000000mM Sigin1 v 0 000 Pd 3 810 5u Modulation V 5 000m MOD 2 Oscillators Demodulators Generation Enable O Reference Frequencies Input E g Low Pass Filters E je Mode Frequency Hz Osc HarmDemod Freq Hz Signal Phase deg Order TC s Signal Output 2 Carrier AM v 10 00000000M iy 1 10 00000000M_ Sigin2 v 0 000 3 810 5u Carrier V 100 0m Sideband 1 C M 10 00000000M 27 nl 10 00000000m Sigin2 v 0 000 3 810 5u Modulation V 5 000m Sideband2 C M 10 00000000M 2y 1 10 00000000M_ Sigin2 v 0 000 bd 3 810 5u Modulation V 5 000m Figure 4 29 LabOne Ul MOD tab The UHF MOD option is designed for experiments where multiple frequencies are involved For many of such experiments the associated spectrum reveals a dominant center frequency often UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zuric
24. executed or a recalibration is requested A time interval longer than 99 minutes is not displayed Manual calibration mode is indicated by a M grey yellow red State of device self calibration Yellow device is warming up and will automatically execute a self calibration after 16 minutes Grey device is warmed up and self calibrated Red it is recommended to manually execute a self calibration to assure operation according to specifications grey green Arithmetic Unit Green indicates which of the arithmetic units is enabled grey yellow red Clock Failure Red present malfunction of the external 10 MHz reference oscillator Yellow indicates a malfunction occurred in the past REC grey green A green indicator shows ongoing data recording related to global recording settings in the Config tab UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 97 4 1 User Interface Overview grey yellow red Signal Input Overflow Red present overflow condition on the signal input also shown by the red front panel LED Yellow indicates an overflow occurred in the past grey yellow red Overflow Signal Output Red present overflow condition on the signal output Yellow indicates an overflow occurred in the past grey yellow red Packet Loss Red present loss of data between the device and the host PC Yellow indicates a loss occurred in the past grey yellow red Sample Loss Red present loss of sample data between the
25. 1 Width deg 10 05 eN ea Start Time s 33 37n Width s 2 878n 0 l Statistics 2 i Averaging Periods 1024 a 17 4mV e i Pe We SA EES Max Rate Sa s 10 00k 9 je 20F ot Cor rae L Value Vs 234 0p 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 atts Overflow Freq Fifo a ja Phase deg Lin fAuto e 0an n Figure 3 31 Boxcar integration of the pulse waveform The result of the integration can also be shown graphically using the Plotter tool as shown below Presets Tree Settings Math T Recording 0 194 Input Signal oO gt x 3 0 000005 S Filter lew Filter l v 0 192 E A 0 00000s TENS dev2032 cD auxouts 0 ea 0 190 1 2 Lin a O 3 0 188 boxcars o 1 demods FS 0 186 0 0 00000000000000Vs i 1 L m A 0 00000000000000Vs i i i 2 4 94 4 93 4 92 4 91 4 90 4 89 i 2 All None f a Time s Lin Man is hoyipco Figure 3 32 Boxcar integration result on Plotter output Baseline Subtraction It may happen that sometimes a noise signal is Superimposed on the measured boxcar output This noise can come from the power supply emf noise coupled through the external wirings or UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 86 3 6 Tutorial PWA and Boxcar Averager even from the experiment itself In this case the baseline subtraction function can be applied to remove the undesired noise found in the Boxcar integration To show the benefits of the baseline subtraction the
26. 10 MHz Clock Out 10 MHz wero enen fe Trigger Inputs 3 amp 4 a Trigger Outputs 3 amp 4 Ultra high Stable Ovenized Oscillator Demodulators amp Oscillators UHF Signal Input 1 Input Range Amplifier LPF 600 MHz Input UHF Signal Input 2 Range ADC 1 8 GSa s 12 bit LPF 600 MHz ADC 1 8 GSa s 12 bit B a C k P a n e Amplifier UHF Signal Output 1 DAC 1 8 GSa s 14 bit Output Range Amplifier UHF Signal Output 2 Output Range Amplifier Periodic Waveform i DAC 1 8 GSa s 14 bit Oscilloscope Reference Triggers 1 amp 2 Analyzer Arithmetic Bidir zz Arithmetic Switch o 88 ME Units A P Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Outputs 1 4 Auxiliary Inputs 1 amp 2 LPF 100 kHz 2x ADC 400 kSa s 16 bit 4x DAC Frequency Response Analyzer 28 w with parameter sweeps Figure 2 1 UHF Instrument overview The UHF Instrument according to Figure 2 1 consists of several internal units light blue color surrounded by several interface units dark blue color and the front panel on the left hand side and the back panelon the right hand side The orange blocks are optional units that can be either ordered at the beginning or upgraded later in the field exceptions are mentioned in Section 2 5 The arrows between the panels and the interface units indicates the physical
27. 26 Pulse waveform in PWA If this resolution is not sufficient one can use the Zoom mode Then by changing the Width deg one can then get more details of the characteristics of the pulse The redefined phase range will then again be subdivided into 1024 bins To acquire the same number of samples for a smaller range will increase acquisition time Note The Zoom mode references internally the input signal to a higher harmonic of the reference frequency which allows zooming into the region of interest and hence increasing the temporal resolution down to millidegrees This gives a precise analysis for pulsed signals with low duty cycles or any other periodically repeating transient Of course the real resolution is still limited by the signal input bandwidth as in the case of the Scope i Input PWA 1 Waveform Amplitude mV A27 15deg 0 0000V A 0 0000V i i i i 110 115 120 125 130 135 l Fl 108 08deg 3 l 135 22deg l I Phase deg Figure 3 27 Pulse waveform in PWA with a zoom width of 27 degrees UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 83 3 6 Tutorial PWA and Boxcar Averager Beside the phase domain display one can also choose the horizontal display axis in the unit of time or frequency The harmonics of the pulse waveform can also be analyzed by choosing Mode to be Harmonic These options areall part of the multi channel multi dom
28. 47 V Analog Temp 2 44 7 C Revisions Auto Calibration Network Configuration 1GbE Packet Loss 0 Digital Current 0 6328 mA Analog Temp 3 41 5 FPGA 28598 Enabled Jumbo Frames Bandwidth 0 017 Mbit s Digital Current 1 3163 mA AnalogTemp4 50 5 C Digital Board 1 3 Time Interval 604800 s Static IP Data Communication Digital Current 2 775 mA Fan Speed 750 RPM Analog Board 1 3 A Temp Threshold 7 00 C IP4 Address 192 168 1 10 Pending 255 Digital Current 3 236 mA FW Load 2 Firmware 28775 Next Calibration 603860 s IP4 Mask 255 255 255 0 Processing 1 FX2 USB 1 37 Manual Gateway 192 168 1 1 Packet Loss 0 Figure 4 24 LabOne UI Device tab The Information section provides details about the Instrument hardware an also gives an overview regarding the upgrade options installed This is also the place where new options can be added by entering the provided instrument key The Configuration section allows to change the reference oscillator from internal to external UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 165 4 15 Device Tab Note Activating Jumbo Frames is essential to achieve maximum data rates and also reduces load on the host PC The Communication section offers access to the instruments TCP IP settings as well as choosing the connection type The Statistic section gives an overview on communication statistics In particular the current data rate Bandwidth that is consumed Note Packet loss on data streaming over UDP or USB d
29. DUT All Pass Delay s 0 000 Fz 7k Streaming Gain 1 000 Y2 300 00 dBV p A 0 00 dBV Max Rate Sa s 1 000k Decimation a Se Figure 4 25 LabOne UI PID tab Frequency Hz With its wide range of different input and output connections the on board PID controllers are extremely versatile and can be used over a wide range of different applications With low internal delays the speed is even high enough to cater to demanding laser locking applications Figure 4 26 shows a block diagram of all PID controller components their interconnections and the variables to be specified by the user PID Controller Demodulator Outputs Down Limiter X Sample p 7 Signal Out Y Offset R_ Signal Out 0 Amplitude Oscillator a dn Frequency Aux Ouputs Demod PID weel x Lee Phase Offset LA Aux Output Center Input Select Output Select Figure 4 26 PID controller block diagram Setting up a control loop Application dependent there is a number of sensible ways to setup a control loop Let s consider a few different approaches and see how the Advisor can help to reduce the effort and improve on the result and understanding of the setup Manual approach UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 170 4 16 PID Tab In cases where the transfer function of the DUT is entirely unknown but little and stationary noise couples into the system from the environment a manual approach is often the quickest way
30. Demodulation Frequencies and Auxiliary Inputs The unit of the X Y R values are by default given in Vays The scaling and the displayed unit can be altered in the Signal Input section of the Lock in Tab The numerical values are supported by graphical bar scale indicators to achieve better readability e g for alignment procedures Display zoom is also available by holding the control key pressed while scrolling with the mouse wheel Certain users may observe rapidly changing digits This is due to the fact that you are measuring thermal noise that maybe in the uV or even nV range depending on the filter settings This provides a first glimpse of the level of measurement precision capable with your UHFLI instrument If you wish to play around with the settings you can now change the amplitude of the generated signal and observe the effect on the demodulator output Next we will have a look at the Plotter tool that allows users to observe the demodulator signals as a function of time It is possible to adjust the scaling of the graph in both directions or make detailed measurements with 2 cursors for each direction Signals of the same signal property are automatically added to the same default y axis group This ensures that the axis scaling is identical Signals can be moved between groups More information on y axis groups can be found in the section called Plot area elements Try zooming in along the time dimension using the mouse wheel
31. E E 144 ATO ANNC CUNE TAD eelas e aa aeae a A A iei Eia 151 A TRAUMA y TAD aaa a a a a N nae 154 AN 2 MOUS OU OUEST GID siura e T E 157 iia eo aD ea rc o ree renee ey ene ene eae ee a eee nee eee eee 158 NAG OGM MO aia a creat a cesarean ad aoe a oan oo ees va seta eden ae aaree 161 Aes DoVe TaD gon ai a a a leds Lea eos ead la aoe ce T65 AOne hon aan a a a a semen acanneests 169 ebre PHLETAD zerine a as oe a E cen tended Mecctuaaea dade Ee A MOD TAD eiar EER En TE r E ERA as 182 AT Oe BOGATA aaa a a a a a et eek i ees 187 A DO OUCPWA MA lt ebcsuinbttan Seance mecigactesatwatttaietthoekansae sree Sicthecusea statedsiou tence aseetegaceiacesae 194 Dx DO CCIMCAUIONS keti ih tes Saeed A ua hie E E EA E E E E E 196 Bo Le GeMOCFal SOCCINCALIONGS yaari aaa i a E E E toes helen 197 De2ab aloe Nterlace SOCCIICALIONS yria a Niet edad oa al tees ied td 200 Sos VISA Ine aCe SOSCII IC AUlONS cation sncusdS acted a diac savas ancesteiate aes eeeaedanes 206 Garer omane Da raS cea cist cea Hele eit a tld ail le asd a cia Cat 209 Bos CLOCK AO RZ ansees n r Ea oe dace a EEEE 21 SOn Device Self Calibration Procedure ordosi a Uy culae i lene ee ee doe es Oates 212 DOSS a gt airaa riie a ce asec adel tac Aorcaea e aaa 215 PAO Sides Sted ate te Ba Bas Sheet ak Ss oes kad Mn chal ies Leia nee des Suctarc re ah Sas ec tad Maes ee 219 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 5 Declaration of Conformity The manufacturer Zurich Instruments Tech
32. In 1 Signal Input 1 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Sig In 2 Signal Input 2 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Trigger 1 Trigger 1 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Trigger 2 Trigger 2 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Aux Out 1 Auxiliary Output 1 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Aux Out 2 Auxiliary Output 2 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Aux Out 3 Auxiliary Output 3 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Aux Out 4 Auxiliary Output 4 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Aux In 1 Auxiliary Input 1 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Aux In 2 Auxiliary Input 2 is connected to the corresponding demodulator l 8th order filter 48 dB oct TC BW Select TG Defines the low pass filter characteristic using time constant of the filter BW NEP Defines the low pass filter characteristic using the noise equivalent power bandwidth of the filter BW 3 dB Defines the low pass filter characteristic using the cut off frequency of the filter UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 116 4 3 Lock in MF Tab TC BW Valu numeric valu Defines the low pass filter characteristic in the unit defined above SINC ON OFF Enables the sinc filter When the filter bandwidth is comparable to or larger than the demodulation frequency the demodulator output may contain frequency components at the frequency of
33. Instruments 161 4 14 Config Tab The User Interface section contains the user preferences that are continuously stored and automatically reloaded the next time an UHFLI is used from the same computer account For low ambient light lab conditions the use of the dark display theme is recommended see Figure 4 23 Config x Device x Aux X Lock in Xx Web Server Sessions User Preferences Record Data Revision 28804 Display Theme Dark v Selection Filter Record O Host 10 42 3 100 Current Session 17 Print Theme Light v View Filter All y Format Matlab Port 8006 Session Dialog Grid Dashed v O Device 2044 BB Folder Data Server Settings Show Shortcuts W Arithmetic Units Cartesian Revision 28804 File Name FunctionalPix Dynamic Tabs f W Au Cartesian 1 Matlab E W Au Cartesian 2 Size 0 000 Bytes ae a W Arithmetic Units Polar Port 8004 Include UI CSV Delimiter Semicolon W au Polar 1 M av Polar 2 File Upload ave oa auxiliary Inputs E oauxini Host 127 0 0 1 Include Device Log Format Connectivity From Everywr Load Preferences O Auto Start Figure 4 23 LabOne Ul Config tab dark theme The Record Data section is the central place where data streaming can be configured and initiated The tree structure allows to deliberately select only the signals of interest to be recorded 4 14 3 Functional Elements Table 4 41 Config tab Web Server Rev Web Server revision number Host default is IP A
34. NANI Version 15 01 28723 m n N S A Server Connectivi 127 0 0 1 a aiia 7 N Bii Available Devices k 4 En Device Interface Status a vA U r C h Instruments Saved Settings Auto Start oJ Name Date vy Comment yy last_session_Pil 2015 03 11 15 39 44 Comment test 2015 03 11 12 56 04 basic setup Jr Mod 2015 02 04 15 49 20 Num 2015 02 04 15 49 20 PII 2015 02 04 15 49 20 Scope 2015 02 04 15 49 20 Sweep 2015 02 04 15 49 20 PWA 2014 09 04 09 58 12 Info No device available Ensure that the device is switched on and connected to the network computer which runs the LabOne Data Server Previous Session Error Closing session 1 due to page unload New session with settings Device amp Ul UI Only Default UI Figure 1 13 No Device Discovered No device Available It all the devices in the Available Devices list are shown grayed this indicates that they are either in use by another Data Server or need a firmware upgrade For firmware upgrade see Section 1 6 If all the devices are in use access is not possible until a connection is relinquished by the another Data Server Since the session requires an active connection the start buttons are inactive Device firmware upgrade needed Ifa device needs a firmware upgrade see Section 1 6 Upgrading the Lock In Amplifier Firmware UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 26 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument Device and Settings LabOne User Interface Version 15 01 2872
35. O e omonier O O O UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 108 4 2 Lock in Tab ee Bth order filter 48 dB oct TC BW Select ike Defines the low pass filter characteristic using time constant of the filter BW NEP Defines the low pass filter characteristic using the noise equivalent power bandwidth of the filter BW 3 dB Defines the low pass filter characteristic using the cut off frequency of the filter TC BW Value numeric value Defines the low pass filter characteristic in the unit defined above ON Z OFF Enables the sinc filter When the filter bandwidth is comparable to or larger than the demodulation frequency the demodulator output may contain frequency components at the frequency of demodulation and its higher harmonics The sinc is an additional filter that attenuates these unwanted components in the demodulator output Lock 5 Makes all demodulators filter settings equal order time constant bandwidth Pressing the lock copies the settings from demodulator one into the settings of all demodulators When the lock is pressed any modification to a field is immediately changing all other settings Releasing the lock does not change any setting and permits to individually adjust the filter settings for each demodulator Enable Streaming ON demodulator Enables the streaming of demodulated samples active in real time to the host computer The streaming rate is defined is the field on the
36. O to 600 MHz Indicates the frequency used for demodulation and for output generation The frequency is calculated with oscillator frequency times the harmonic factor When the MOD option is used linear combinations of oscillator frequencies including the harmonic factors define the demodulation frequencies Phase deg 1 380 to 1 80 Phase shift applied to the reference input of the demodulator and also to signal on the Signal Outputs Zero Adjust the demodulator phase automatically in order to read zero degrees Shifts the phase of the reference at the input of the demodulator in order to achieve zero phase at the demodulator output This action maximizes the X output zeros the Y output zeros the O output and leaves the R output unchanged Signal Sig In 1 Signal Input 1 is connected to the corresponding demodulator In 2 Signal Input 2 is connected to the corresponding i ator Trigger 1 Trigger 1 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Trigger 2 Trigger 2 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Aux Out 1 Auxiliary Output 1 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Aux Out 2 Auxiliary Output 2 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Aux Out 3 Auxiliary Output 3 is connected to the corresponding demodulator Aux Out 4 Auxiliary Output 4 is connected to the corresponding demodulator ae In 1 Auxiliary Input 1 is connected to the ae demodulator lary Input 2 is connected to the demodulator
37. PLL Lock 118 9m PM deg 80 63 Se a ena oer i Freq Shift Hz 54 22 PLL BW Hz 10 24k 10 10 10 10 10 pam Papacy pia Figure 3 19 PLL settings and simulation in the PLL tab When the PLL is locked the green indicator beside the label Error PLL Lock will be switched on The actual frequency shift is shown in the field Freq Shift Hz Note At this point it is recommended to adjust the signal input range by pressing on the Auto Range button in the Lock in tab This will sometimes help the PLL to lock to an input signal with a better signal to noise ratio The easiest way to visualize the frequency drift is to use the Plotter tool One simply needs to select Frequency and Channel 8 and then press the button Add Signal This will add an additional signal in the Plotter window The frequency short term drift noise can be further reduced sometimes by decreasing the PLL bandwidth UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 79 3 5 Tutorial Automatic Gain Control 3 5 Tutorial Automatic Gain Control 3 9 1 3 9 2 3 9 3 Note This tutorialis applicable to UHF Instruments having the UHF PID Quad PID PLL Controller option installed Goals and Requirements This tutorial explains howto setup a PID controller for automatic gain control The tutorial can also be performed as a continuation to the previous PLL tutorial i e the PLL can be kept running Just like the PLL tutorial an external quartz resonator i
38. Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 98 4 1 User Interface Overview Table 4 5 Mouse functionality inside plots Panning left click on any moves plot area location and move waveforms around ZOOM X axis mouse wheel zooms in and out the plot area X axis shift mouse wheel zooms in and out the Y axis Window zoom shift and left mouse selects the area of plot are area select the waveform to be zoomed in a Absolute jump of left mouse click moves the bluezoom X and Y range zoom area range indicators but outside of the blue zoom range indicators Absolute move of left mouse drag and moves the blue zoom X and Y range inside zoom area drop range indicators of the blue range indicators Zoom mouse wheel zooms in and out the X and Y range related axis Full Scale double click set X and Y axis to x x scale Each plot area contains a legend that lists allthe shown signals in the respective color The legend can be moved to any desired position by means of drag and drop The X range and Y range controls are described in Table 4 6 Table 4 6 Plot control description Axis scaling mode gt Selects between automatic full scale and manual axis scaling Axis mapping mode tin ante Select between linear logarithmic and decibel 8 axis mapping Axis zoom in Zooms the respective axis in by a factor of 2 Axis zoom out Zooms the respective axis out by a factor of 2 Rescale axis to data Rescale the foreground Y axis in t
39. Settings shown in Figure 1 9 An example of the connection lost dialog is shown below Error LabOne User Interface SNL A o f N Zurich Instruments Error The connection with LabOne Web Server is lost Retry Reload Figure 1 11 Dialog Connection Lost Reloading If a session error cannot be handled the LabOne Web Server will restart and present a new Dialog Device and Settings as shown in the section called Device And Settings Dialog During the restart a window is displayed indicating that the LabOne User Interface will reload If reloading does not happen the same effect can be triggered by pressing Fb on the browser window The figure below shows an example of this dialog Reloading LabOne User Interface SNA A a fe o f N Zurich Instruments Info LabOne User Interface is reloading Figure 1 12 Dialog Reloading UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 25 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument No Device Discovered An empty Available Devices list means that no devices were discovered in the network In this situation the LabOne Data Server is running but failed to detect any devices The device may be switched off or the interface connection fails For more information on the USB and Ethernet interface between device and PC see Section 1 5 3 Device Connectivity Since a session requires an active connection the start buttons are inactive Device and Settings LabOne User Interface
40. Settings Files Certain file names can be observed with the prefix last_session_ Such files are created automatically by the LabOne Web Server when a session is terminated either explicitly by the user or under critical error conditions and save the current UI and device settings The prefix is prepended to the name of the most recently used settings file This allows any unsaved changes to be recovered upon starting a new session If a user loads such a last session settings file the last_session_ prefix will be cut away from the file name Otherwise there is a risk that an auto save will overwrite a setting which was saved explicitly by the user The settings file with the name default_ui also has special meaning As the name suggests this file contains the default UI settings See button description in Table 1 7 Table 1 7 Button Descriptions Device amp UI The Device and UI settings contained in the selected settings file will be loaded UI Only Only the UI settings contained in the selected settings file will be loaded The device settings remain unchanged Default UI Loads the default LabOne UI settings The device settings remain unchanged Auto Start Skips the session dialog at startup if selected device is available The default UI settings will be loaded with unchanged device settings Note The factory default UI settings can be customized by saving a file with the name default_ui in the Config tab once
41. Signal Order BW 3 dB sinc ER En Rate Sa s EE 2 Output 1 Range 1 0 27 1 Manual 10 00000000M 1 Demod v iv 1 10 00000000M Sigin v 3 v 100 1 1 717k E On 509 Scaling 1 viv 2 Manual 10 00000000M 2 Demod v 1 1 10 00000000M Siginl v 3 100 1 1 717k Range 15V v AC 5092 g a5 3 Demod vy iv 1 10 00000000M Siginl v 3 100 1 1 717k Offset V 0 000 o 4 Demod v 1 1 10 00000000M Sigin1 v 3 100 1 1 717k Amp Vpk 100 0m Input 2 duh Output 2 Range 1 0 as 5 Demod vw 2 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 1 g 1 717k On 500 J Scaling 1 viv o 6 Demod vw 2 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 4 1 717k 4 Range 15V v AC 509 a 7 Demod v 2 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 3 v 100 1 1 717k Offset V 0 000 ams 8 Demod v 2 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 1 717k Amp Vpk 100 0m Figure 4 5 LabOne User Interface Lock in From left to right the tab is organized in the following sections the Signal Inputs section allows the user to define all relevant settings specific to the signal entered as for example input coupling range etc The Oscillators section indicates the frequencies of both internal oscillators These frequencies can be either manually defined by typing a frequency value in the field or they can be referenced to an external source The Demodulators section holds the main settings for the 8 dual phase demodulator units Some of the available options like phase adjustment and the trigger functionalit
42. Signal Output 1 2 or both Select Signal Output 1 2 or none Carrier V rangetorange Set the carrier amplitude 7 ae ON OFF Enable the carrier signal Modulation V rangetorange Set the amplitude of the first sideband Index Amplitude V component Modulation V Peak range to range Set the amplitude of the second sideband Dev Hz Amplitude component V Enable FM Peak ON OFF In FM modulation choose to work with either Mode modulation index or peak deviation The modulation index equals peak deviation divided by modulation frequency Enable ON OFF Enable the signal generation for the first sideband Enable ON OFF Enable the signal generation for the second sideband UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 186 4 19 Boxcar Tab 4 19 Boxcar Tab The Boxcar tab relates to the UHF BOX Boxcar option and is only available if this option is installed on the UHF Instrument see Information section in the Device tab 4 19 1 Features m 2 equivalent boxcar units with up to 450 MHz repetition rate m Baseline suppression for each Boxcar unit m upto 450 MHz repetition rate m Dead time free operation for frequencies below 450 MHz m Period waveform analyzer PWA allows display of waveform and convenient graphical setting of Boxcar averaging windows m PWA frequency domain view allows for simultaneous analysis of up to 512 harmonics of the reference frequency 4 19 2 Description The Boxcar tab
43. T L I L 1 I L I 1 1 I i L Input Range 1 5V ee Input Range 800mV Input Range 200mV Input Range 100mV F F F F n DEREAT 5 ate adda 444 4 l Frequency Hz Figure 5 4 Input noise with 50Q input impedance Input noise amplitude depends on several parameters and in particular on the frequency and the setting for the input range The input noise is lower for smaller input ranges and it is recommended to use small ranges especially for noise measurements Only the noise with DC input coupling is shown here as the input noise with AC coupling is the same as long as the frequency is above the AC cutoff frequency see Table 5 5 The corner frequency of the 1 f noise is in the range of 100 kHz and the white noise floor is around 4 nV V Hz for the smallest input range 209 Zurich Instruments Revision 28900 UHF User Manual 5 4 Performance Diagrams Ci gt i _ fa gt U eb O 2 O Cc eb O O gt Q RoaA rRE 1 1 I L L I T L I 1 1 1 L I 1 1 I 1 L L I T L 1 L 1 1 L 1 1 1 I i L Input Range 1 5V Input Range 800mV Input Range 200mV Input Range 100mV ed ee i H F I I moe an En I H I I J I I 5 I I I I I k F I r 5 1 H 1 1 I 1 1 H 1 1 I 1 I a ae E ee ee See ee or weer b 1 1 T 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 L E L 1 T
44. The Scope tab serves as the graphical display unit for time domain data Whenever it is closed or a new instance is needed pressing the following symbol will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 20 App icon and short description scope Displays shots of data samples in time and frequency domain FFT representation UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 125 4 6 Scope Tab Scope x Numeric Xx Plotter x Add Row x Control Trigger Advanced Math Scope Chi Wav Scope Ch2 Wave i l l i Horizontal Mode Time Domain Wave V Sampling Rate 1 80GHz Length pts 4 5120 Vertical Channel 1 Signal Input 1 Ag Min 100 0r Max 100 0r H gt ES Channel 2 Signal Input 2 Ts j j Min 1 0 Max 1 0 Avg Filter None gt Averages 1 R Vertical Axis Groups Signal Type Channel Scope v1 Wave V _ Scope Chi Wave Scope Ch2 Wave 1 0 1 5 2 0 2 5 Drop signal here for new group Time ps Drop signal group here to remove Figure 4 10 LabOne UI Scope tab Time domain The Scope tab consists of a plot on the left and the control tabs on the right side In essence it is a single channel oscilloscope that can be used to observe a choice of signals in both time and frequency domain representation Hence the X axis of the plot area is time for time domain display Figure 4 10 and frequency for frequency domain display Figure 4 12 It is possible to simply switch between
45. User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 70 3 3 Tutorial Amplitude Modulation QE Config x Aux x Lock in x Add Row x a Oscillators Demodulators Signal Outputs Reference Frequencies Input Low Pass Filters Data Transfer Ep Mode Frequency Hz Mode Osc Harm Demod Freq Hz 2 Signal Order BW 3dB Sinc E amp En Rate Sa s 58 3 Output 1 a OO 41 Manual 10 0000000M 1Mod 1 10 0000000M a Signi 3 100 4 Q 7ax E 2 o Q 2Manual 100 0000000k 2Mod 2 1 10 1000000M Sign1 3 100 Q 17 Range 15V amp 3 Manual 10 0000000M 3Mod 2 1 9 9000000 Signi 3v zoo O Q iak Offset 0 000 v 4 Manual 10 0000000M 4 Demod 1 1 10 0000000M Signi 34 100 1 717k 4 5 Manual 10 0000000M 5 Demod 2 1 100 0000000k Sigin2 3v 10 1 717k Output 2 6 Manual 10 0000000 6 Demod 2 1 100 0000000k Sigin2 3 100 O 1 717k 4 on B 7 Manual 10 0000000M 7 Demod 2 1 100 0000000k Sign2 3 100 1 717k Range 1 5V 8 Manual 10 0000000M 8 Demod 2 1 100 0000000k Sigin2 3v 100 O 1 717k Offset 0 000 V Scope x Numeric x Add Row x ux Demodulator 1 x Demodulator 1 x Demodulator 2 x Demodulator 2 x Presets Tree Settings R 0 38635 V 13 06244 deg R 35 11212mV 13 30693 deg me Select a Preset M embee bree rererere lleerenrererererrrerererere frerreerrrerrrerrhrrrrerererrrerre Demods Polar oo 05 10 15 20 100 0 100 00 05 10 15 20 100 0 100 Demods Cartesian Demodulator 3
46. With that in place the Advise algorithm will automatically adjust the demodulator bandwidth to a value about 5 time higher than the target bandwidth in order to avoid to be limited by demodulation speed With all the model information and the Target Bandwidth the Advise algorithm will now calculate a target step response function that it will try to achieve by adjusting the parameters in the next step Before doing so in case of a newly set up DUT model the algorithm will first try to estimate the PID parameters by using the Ziegler Nichols method When there has been a previous run the user can also change the parameters in the model manually which will the be used as new start parameters of the next Advise run The last step of the advise algorithm is a simplex search similar to the one used for the auto tune feature describe above The main difference is that the advise algorithm tries to achieve a least square fit to the target step response function where as the auto tune minimizes the average PID Error i e an experimental parameter The simulated result is numerically characterized by a bandwidth and a phase margin Moreover the large diagram on the right allows to characterize the result of the model by displaying transfer functions magnitude and phase and step responses between different signal notes inside the loop Once the modelling is finished one can simply copy the resulting parameters to the actual PID by pressing the button To PID T
47. a list of visible devices A device is ready for use if either marked free or connected The first column of the list is the Connect button If the button is enabled the device is connected by the LabOne Data Server In this case no other LabOne Data Server running on another PC can access the device Only one interface and LabOne Data Server can access the device The second column indicates the device serial A device may be listed multiple times if it supports several physical interfaces The third column indicates the interface For UHF devices the interfaces USB 1GbE or 10GbE are available The interface is listed if physically connected The LabOne Data Server will scan for the available devices and interfaces every second If a device has just been switched on or physically connected it may take up to 20s before it becomes visible to the LabOne Data Server If an interface is physically connected but not visible please read Section 1 5 3 Device Connectivity The last column indicates the status of the device Device Status Table 1 5 explains the meaning of the possible device status information Table 1 5 Device Status Information Free The device is not in use by any LabOne Data Server and can be connected by pressing the Connect button If the device is selected a session can be started immediately without prior connecting The session start will automatically connect the device In Use The device is in use by a LabOne Data Ser
48. about 90 degrees but decreases abruptly until reaching the value of about 4 7 degrees at the resonance peak Note For most resonators a phase shift of approximately 90 degrees at resonance can be expected If the cables are not excessively long UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments T3 3 4 Tutorial Phase locked Loop 3 4 4 UHF User Manual Amplitude R mV 2 377MV Demodulator 8 A 2 377mV 2150 5779kHz A 2150 5779kHz 0 000000V E 2 149 2 150 2 151 2 152 2 15 Frequency Hz x10 Figure 3 17 frequency sweep amplitude response Phase deg 50 2150 5774kHz A 2150 5774kHz Demodulator 8 b Cy Sr rc aE a a ts eRe a SO EE 0 a i A0 2deg I I i 2 1485 2 1490 2 1495 2 1500 2 1505 2 1510 2 1515 2 1520 2 1525 2 Frequency Hz x10 Figure 3 18 frequency sweep phase response Resonance Tracking with the PLL Now that we have located the resonance frequency and its phase we can now track the drift in resonance frequency by locking on to the phase that we just measured using the Sweeper hence the name phase locked loop The phase locked loop is available under the PLL tab There are two PLLs in each UHF unit For this tutorial we will use PLL 2 We first set up the basic PLL 2 fields as shown in the table below using the values from the Sweeper Table 3 16 Settings acquire the reference signal PLL 2 Center Freq Hz 2 1506M Revision 28900 Zurich Ins
49. blue 6 Press the Default UI button on the lower right the UI The default configuration loaded and the first measurements can be taken In cases the device could not be found or the UI does not start at all please be referred to Section 1 5 2 Once the Instrument is up and running we recommend to go through some of the tutorials given in Chapter 3 Moreover Chapter 4 provides a general Introduction to the various tools and settings tabs with tables in each section providing a detailed description of every Ul element as well For specific application know how the Blog section www zhinst com blogs of the Zurich Instruments web page will serve as a valuable resource that is constantly updated and expanded Note The responsiveness of web browser user interface can be rather slow and still consuming plenty of CPU power when graphical hardware acceleration is not enabled On most computers the situation can easily be improved by either Gotothe NVIDIA control panel Select graphic processor Apply m Control panel Control Panel Appearance and Personalization Display Screen Resolution Advanced settings Trouble shoot Change settings Does not work with NVIDIA with NVIDIA you need to use the NVIDIA control panel Some computers have two graphic chip sets installed an Intel and a NVIDIA chip set Activating the NVIDIA along with the accelaration is strongly recommended to achieve best possible performance The only drawback changing the
50. by the user Manual or if another instrument resource determines the frequency e g ExtRef PLL In such cases the associated frequency field will be greyed out In internal reference mode a demodulator operates at the ideal internally generated frequency and provides the best possible demodulation For external reference mode It is required to internally recover the demodulation frequency with a high quality PLL A green light right next to the frequency will then indicate smooth operation The next section contains the Demodulators settings In total there are 8 lines each representing one demodulator The Mode column is read only for all demodulators except 4 and 8 which can be to set to either internal reference Demod or external reference mode ExtRef When internal reference mode is selected it is possible to demodulate the input signal with 4 demodulators simultaneously using different filter settings or at different harmonic frequencies of the reference frequency For external reference mode one demodulator is used for the reference recovery and a few Settings are greyed out and therefore 3 demodulators remain for simultaneous measurements The Signal column always defines the signal that is taken as input for the demodulator A wide choice of signals can be selected among the Signal Inputs the Trigger Inputs the Auxiliary Inputs and Auxiliary Outputs Like this it is possible to flexibly generate advanced measurement topologies
51. changes and additions to the HF2LI HF2IS products m HF2LI MOD option fixed calculation of index of modulation HF2LI PID option fixed calculation of MOD sidebands m Sweeper PID setpoint sweeper Revision 20274 22 Nov 2013 Document overhaul and extension compliant to 13 10 product release Updates include the getting started chapter the ordering guide added new tutorials and updated the functional description As of this release the LabOne tooltips inside of the user interface correspond to the description of the functional elements in this user manual Detailed changes and additions to the product m Instrument back panel former Trigger 1 2 on the back panel of the instrument have been renamed to Trigger 3 4 m USB connectivity USB high speed 480 Mbit s fully supported as interface alternative to LAN Simpler connectivity m NEW option UHF BOX Boxcar Averager 1 boxcar and periodic waveform analyzer PWA jitter free averaging scope on signal inputs requires UHF BOX option m NEW option UHF BOX Boxcar Averager 2 multi channel boxcar periodic waveform analyzer PWA on boxcar outputs m Linux support m Scope oscilloscope and FFI spectrum analyzer are now Integrated on a single tab Scope sampling rates down to 27 kSa s m Scope dual edge trigger m General User Interface improved design and drag amp drop functionality for all tabs Lock in integrated Tandem demodulation full support demodulation of auxiliar
52. conditions 197 Spectrum Analyzer Tab 140 Stability Input amplitude 200 Status bar Description 97 Storage conditions 197 SW Trigger lab 136 Sweeper lab 144 T Time constant Specifications 203 Toolset Description 95 Tree Sub Tab Description 101 Trigger connector Back panel 51 Troubleshooting 42 U USB Back panel 51 User Interface Description 93 V Vertical Axis Groups Description 102 Voltage ranges Input AC 200 Zurich Instruments 220 W Windows Software installation 13 Z ZCtrl Back panel 51 Specifications 208 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 221
53. connections and the data direction flow Only a very small subset of internal connections is depicted The signal of interest to be measured is often connected to one of the two UHF signal inputs where it is amplified to a defined range and digitized at very high speed The resulting samples are fed into the digital signal processor consisting of up to 8 dual phase demodulators The output samples of the demodulators flow into one digital interface to be transferred to a host computer LAN and USB interfaces or are available on the auxiliary outputs on the front panel of the UHF Instrument The numerical oscillators generate sine and cosine signal pairs that are used for the demodulation of the input samples and also for the generation of the UHF output signals For this purpose the Output Adder can generate a linear combination of the oscillator outputs to generate a multi frequency output signal digital to analog conversion and signal scaling range are supported Hardware trigger and reference signals are used for various purposes inside the instrument such as triggering demodulation triggering oscilloscope data acquisition or to generate external reference clocks or triggering signals to other equipment Lock in Operating Modes m Internal reference mode m External reference mode UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 46 2 1 Features m Auto reference mode Dual lock in operation two independent lock in amplifier
54. device and the host PC Yellow indicates a loss occurred in the past Reset status flags Clear the current state of the status flags gsrey yellow green Rubidium Clock Grey no rubidium clock is installed Yellow Rubidium clock is warming up takes approximately 300 s Green Rubidium clock is warmed up and locked grey green Boxcar Green indicates which of the boxcar units is enabled grey green MOD Green indicates which of the modulation kits is enabled grey green PID Green indicates which of the PID units is enabled grey green PLL Green indicates which of the PLLs is enabled 4 Toggles the browser between full screen and normal mode 4 1 3 Plot Functionality Several tools Plotter Scope SW Trig Spectrum Sweeper Boxcar and outPWA provide a graphical display of measurement data in the form of plots These are multi functional tools with zooming panning and cursor capability This section introduces some of the highlights Plot area elements Plots consist of the plot area the X range and the range controls The X range above the plot area indicates which section of the wave is displayed by means of the blue zoom region indicators The two ranges show the full scale of the plot which does not change when the plot area displays a zoomed view The two axes of the plot area instead do change when zoom is applied The mouse functionality inside of plot is Summarized in Table 4 5 UHF User Manual
55. following connections can be made to simulate an undesired period noise injection In this example the UHF Signal Output 1 is used to generated a 10 kHz sine wave superimposed on top of the AWG waveform through a T connector U Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Aux Output 0000 Front Panel Out Syne Figure 3 33 UHF connection for baseline subtraction test Table 3 22 Settings superpose a sine wave on top of the pulse waveform When this is done the Plotter tool will display an integrated value with the 10 kHz sine component instead of the flat line shown previously Presets Tree Settings Math Run Stop Recording 53 Input Signal Selection Filter Boxcar ns 0 00000s A 0 00000s View Filter All dev2032 auxouts 0 00000000000000Vs mm A 0 00000000000000Vs j j i 2 AQ A Q AQ 9 4 39 i Fa 4 94 4 93 4 92 4 91 4 90 4 89 FF EZE NAERA a a Time s Lin Man a SSS DD o Bee v Ov Uw Figure 3 34 Boxcar output without baseline subtraction In order to eliminate this undesired sine variation one can simply go to the Baseline sub tab in the Boxcar tool The important point is to select a baseline window with the cursor with the same width as the Boxcar integration window e g 10 degrees in this tutorial The baseline window is chosen to center around the zero crossing value of the PWA waveform when possible This is done so the baseline integr
56. group This signal will now have its own axis system Change vertical axis group of a signal Use drag amp drop to move a signal from one group into another group that has the same unit Group separation In case a group hosts multiple signals and the unit of some of these signals changes the group will be split in several groups according to the different new units Remove a signal from the group In order to remove a signal from a group drag amp drop the signal to a free area inside the Vertical Axis Groups box Remove a vertical axis group A group is removed as soon as the last signal of a custom group is removed Default groups will remain active until they are explicitly removed by drag amp drop If a new signal is added that match the group properties it will be added again to this default group This ensures that settings of default groups are not lost unless explicitly removed Rename a vertical axis group New groups get a default name Group of This name can be changed by double clicking on the group name Hide show a signal Uncheck check the check box of the signal This is faster than fetching a signal from a tree again UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 102 4 1 User Interface Overview Scope Xx Numeric x Plotter x AddRow x o Control Tree Settings Math Demodulator 1 R Demodulator 2 R Select a Preset Amplitude mV Enabied Vemos R lt X2 0 000 s Ena
57. handling of the instrument The disregard of these precautions and all specific warnings elsewhere in this manual may affect correct operation of the equipment and its lifetime Zurich Instruments assumes no liability for the user s failure to observe and comply with the instructions in this user manual Table 1 2 Safety Instructions Ground the instrument The chassis must be correctly connected to earth ground by means of the supplied power cable Alternatively also the ground pin on the rear panel can be used This avoids electrical shocks and potential damage to the instrument Maximum ratings The specified electrical ratings for the connectors of the instrument should not be exceeded at any time during operation please refer to section Section 5 1 Do not service or adjust anything yourself There are no serviceable parts inside the Instrument Software updates Frequent software updates provide the user with many important improvements as well as new features Only the last released software version is Supported by Zurich Instruments Instructions contained in any warning issued by the instrument either by the software the graphical user interface or mentioned in this manual must be followed Instructions contained in the notes of this user manual are of essential importance for the correct interpretation of the acquired measurement data Location and ventilation Keep and operate the Instrument in a dry location that
58. in Out to Min 100 0r Max 100 0 z Channel 2 Signal Input 2 ts O gt in Man Min 1 0 Max 1 0 Avg Filter None b Lin Averages 1 R Vertical Axis Groups Signal Type Channel Scope vi Wave V A Hl scope Ch2 Wave 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 0 2 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 1 2 1 4 Drop signal here for new group Time ys Drop signal group here to remove eloko Berm 17 CAL REC au CF OVI OVO PL SL Ddvice dev2044 Session 25 iDAQ setInt dev2044 scopes O single 1 000000000 plot control icons plot tab row Figure 4 2 LabOne User Interface more items Table 4 1 gives s brief descriptions and naming conventions for the most important UI items Table 4 1 LabOne User Interface features side bar left hand side of the Ul contains app icons app icons that activate the tool tabs and settings tabs a click to a tab icon adds or activates the corresponding tab in the active row tab status bar bottom side of the UI contains important status indicators status Indicators warning lamps device and session information and access to the command log main area center of the UI accommodates all rows and columns active tabs tooltabs oftab rows each and setting tabs new consisting of tab bar rows can be added and the active tab area UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 94 4 1 User Interface Overview and removed by using the control elements on the right hand side of the tab bar located
59. is then also halved Hence lock in amplification which normally references to the fundamental frequency may not always be the best way to recover a signal if the pulse waveform has a duty cycle smaller than 50 In this case boxcar averaging may be the more efficient measurement method For instance if one sees the signal spread out over many harmonic components without any prominent peak a boxcar detection scheme might be the wiser choice to achieve the best possible signal to noise ratio To perform this tutorial one will require at least one 8rd party programmable arbitrary wave generator for narrow pulse generation 3 6 2 Preparation Connect the cables as illustrated below Make sure the UHF is powered on and then connect the UHF through the USB to your PC or to your local area network LAN where the host computer resides After starting LabOne the default web browser opens with the LabOne graphical user interface U H Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Aux Output 00 O88 0000 Front Panel Figure 3 24 UHF connections to an external arbitrary wave generator The tutorial can be started with the default instrument configuration e g after a power cycle and the default user interface settings e g as is after pressing F5 in the browser UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 80 3 6 Tutorial PWA and Boxcar Averager 3 6 3 Low Duty Cycle Signal Measurem
60. nE a de dadeesneienl Me decterey cuueanleae A E EEE 45 Ale Wi COMES a cin hae eae es ea ia he 2d a es ea oe hs laa a 46 Ar FOIE TOUT sranna a ata aan sind ea oan anee sah a 49 Zoe BCK P aN SL TOUT bonia yt ultendectiea cesta a a a N 51 TACO MG UMS PAWAS OOO ANI sserrep e Ne ar E is 52 AOs Ordonne CMOS iie a a a a a uy Gad eiannca rte Peace ulir 99 Se NCEE Oa US aaa a a a a a T eet cece D0 Se l HUTON elle IOVS OOD ascent nd guia alae Setanta dain k on a ead aaah O dea edie de 56 3 A tutora l External RETCKENCS aurtrrpee irea a a E E EE aE EERE Ei 61 3 00 AONA AMOUS MOCULATIO eiia a casei ose ie Meee tale 68 24 gt tOna PraSealOC KEG LOOD sinehan Seni ache Rinahtaingtecntna nna stecieg s cide Mua abteneteanarcen 72 Or0e PUTO al AUTOMmalic Gally CONTON rten a ies ee area sera I 76 3 07 Tutorial PWA anad Boxcar AVClASSD winavtniwatecusioniartigautetneenectia tua diei arei ae i arig 80 3 7 l Utornat M ltienanne BOXCA AVCraser donirai ni a a 89 4 Funcional Description Labone Yser INMtert ac icssiessdcnderswoselaediatacersd airi eee Eie 92 Ail ISOM IOC ace OVa OW soena a a cnet da leabieacdt 93 fe LOCKA TAD ieia E a E ETE 104 feo OCK AIEN E Fa a a E ee ok ta od oo le idee ee w2 AD ANUNG TAD kasae a aa a a aaa eN 120 Aos POTTOF TADS sreske a a a a Smet e anil nae mee etoneiid T22 POO COD CTIA anien na a r eed ee ae a a e i 125 Ake ONW S Treger TAD an a O A A ae ee 136 AO SUS CUM ANY ZEr VAD maaie e a E a a e EEE 140 A Oe WOS por TaD gne a a a a a a
61. or the icons below the graph to display about one second of the data stream While zooming in the mode in which the data are displayed will change from a min max envelope plot to linear point interpolation depending on the density of points along the x axis as compared to the number of pixels available on the screen Amplitude V 0 17670 0 17665 0 17660 0 0000000V 1 A 0 0000000V i i i i I i 19 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 17655 amp Time s Figure 3 2 LabOne User Interface Plotter displaying demodulator results continuously over time roll mode UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 59 3 1 Tutorial Simple Loop 3 1 6 Different Filter Settings As next step in this tutorial you will learn to change the filter settings and see their effect on the measurement results For this exercise use the second demodulator with the same settings as the first except in changing the time constant of the integration to 1 ms which corresponds to a 3 dB bandwidth of 83 Hz Table 3 5 Settings generate the reference signal tockin Demeduiators i Order e118 48 000 Lowering the time constant reduces the filter integration time of the demodulators This will in turn smooth out the demodulator outputs and hence increases available time resolution Note that itis recommended to keep the sample rate 7 to 10 times the filter 3 dB bandwidth The sample rate will be rounded off to the next available sampling f
62. outputs by means of a drive signal The digital output data is latched synchronously with the falling edge of the internal clock which is running at 56 25 MHz The internal sampling clock is available at the DOL pin of the DIO connector Digital input data can either be sampled by the internal clock or by an external clock provided through the CLKI pin Adecimated version of the input clock is used to sample the input data The Decimation unit counts the clocks to decimation and then latches the input data The default decimation is 5625000 corresponding to a digital input sampling rate of 1 sample per second UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 206 5 3 Digital Interface Specifications DRIVE 3 OUTPUT 31 24 DIO 31 24 INPUT 31 24 VAN DRIVE 2 OUTPUT 23 16 DIO 23 16 INPUT 23 16 DRIVE 1 OUTPUT 15 8 DIO 15 8 INPUT 15 8 DRIVE O OUTPUT 7 0 DIO 7 01 INPUT 7 0 DECIMATION CLKI counts to decimation ra pot A AVA AVA AAV then latches the intput data V EXTCLOCK internal clock 56 25 MHz DIO Connector Figure 5 2 DIO input output architecture UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 5 3 Digital Interface Specifications 5 3 2 ZCtrl Peripheral Port The ZCtrl port serves to power and communicate to external equipments such as pre amplifiers the port provides a floating power supply with 14 5 V and 100 mA per port After Instrument power o
63. parameter suggestion and transfer function analysis m Phase unwrap for extended lock range and increased stability Auto zero functions for center frequency and set point m Generation of sub multiple frequencies by use of harmonic multiplication factor 4 17 2 Description The PLL tab offers the user a convenient way to use the PID controllers and demodulators in combination to set up a phase locked loop where the frequency from an external signal is mapped to one of the Instruments numeric oscillators An advisor functionality that is based on mathematical models helps the user finding and optimizing the different parameters and quickly optimizing the servo bandwidth for the application Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 47 icon and short description Features all control and analysis capabilities of the phase locked loops The PLL tab see Figure 4 27 is divided into two side tabs one for each PLL and contains a settings sections on the left and a modelling section with graph support on the right UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 178 AAS PEG Lap Config x Device x Aux X Lock in x PLL Xx Add Row x 1 PLLA PLL Advisor as E oeo ee ee 2 Enable Ss O g d AIDER 8 a EJ X2 1 0000 fHz Oscillator 1 v Advanced Mode 5 100 F A 0 0000 fHz Center Freq Hz 10 00000000M Application Open Loop Upper Limit Hz 15
64. provides access to the gated averager functionality of the UHF Instrument Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 51 App icon and short description Boxcar Boxcar settings and periodic waveform analyzer for fast input signals Each Boxcar unit is shown in a separate sub tab see Figure 4 31 that consists of a plot area and three control tabs on the right hand side Scope x Numeric Xx Boxcar x Add Row x 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 PWA Boxcar Math Enable Boxc m alee m E 2 Signal Input Input Signal Sig In1 X1 11 9 deg X2 192 6 deg i A 180 7 deg hs Amplitude mV Frequency Hz 13 12300000M Gate oss i ep Start deg 4 11 93 Width s Oo s v Auto i Baseline Copy Urso 5 i Start deg 4 2000 Lin Statistics O Averaging Periods 1024 Averaging BW Hz 5 667k Fz l Rate Limit Sa s 1 000k 4 S i Value V 2 106n 2 Sample Loss 150 200 250 300 350 Phase deg Figure 4 31 LabOne UI Boxcar tab UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 187 4 19 Boxcar Tab Similar to the lock in amplifier functionality the Boxcar offers a large reduction of the incoming signal bandwidth sampled with 1 8 GSa s to a regime where much lower sampling rates suffice that can easily be transfered to a PC over USB or Ethernet cable for further analysis and post processing For both me
65. reference mode yes yes yes Auto reference mode yes yes yes yes Dual channel operation 2 yes yes independent measurement units Signal generators Superposed output sinusoidals per generator Quad harmonic mode yes yes Multi frequency mode Arbitrary frequency mode yes yes upto 8 Bi Li yes DN N N N S yes 100 dB 100 dB 100 dB 600 MHz 600 MHz 600 MHz UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 53 Lock in range 600 MHz 2 0 Ordering Guide Feature UHFLI URF El USB 2 0 480 Mbit s yes LAN 1 Gbit s UHF User Manual yes Revision 28900 UHF MF yes yes Zurich Instruments UHFLI UHFLI UHF PID UHF MF UHF PID yes yes 54 Chapter 3 Tutorials The tutorials in this chapter have been created to allow users to become more familiar with the basic technique of lock in amplification the operation of host based lock in amplifiers the LabOne web browser based user interface as well as some more advanced lock in measurement techniques In order to successfully carry out the tutorials users are required to have certain laboratory equipment and basic equipment handling knowledge The equipment list is given below Note For all tutorials you must have LabOne installed as described inthe Getting Started Chapter 1 USB 2 0 cable 1 LAN cable supplied with your UHFLI Instrument 3 BNC cables SMA cable and adaptors 1 male BNC shorting cap optional
66. resource path C Program Files Zurich Instruments LabOne WebServer html device ip 192 168 1 10 The LabOne Data Server UHF shortcut Target field should look like this C Program Files Zurich Instruments LabOne DataServer ZiDataserver exe devyice ip 192 168 1410 ae LabOne Data Server UHF Properties if fat 4 LabOne Data Server UHF Target type Application Target location DataServer Target erver ziDataServer exe deviceip 192 168 1 10 Start in C Program Files Zuich Instruments LabOne Dz Shortcut key Mone Ain Comment Figure 1 20 Static IP shortcut modification 3 Optional To verify the connection between the host computer and the UHF Instrument open a DOS command window and ping the IP address entered above Requirements m Device IP must be known m Needs network administrator support on networks with dynamic IP configuration Device Discovery TCP IP 10GbE UHF 10G The 10GbE interface is a hardware option UHF 10G for the Zurich Instruments UHFLI Itis possible to upgrade any UHFLI with this option The UHF 10G option consists of following components PCle card 10 Gigabit XF SR Server Adapter UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument m Cisco X2 10GB SR module m dm multi mode fiber optic patch cord 10G option code XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX KXXXXXXXX Hardwar
67. right hand side As a consequence demodulated samples can be visualized on the plotter and a corresponding numeric entry in the numerical tool is activated Note increasing number of active demodulators increases load on physical connection to the host computer OFF demodulator Disables the streaming of demodulated samples inactive to the host computer Rate Sa s 0 42 Sa s to Defines the demodulator sampling rate the 2 3 MSars number of samples that are sent to the host computer per second A rate of about 7 10 higher as compared to the filter bandwidth usually provides sufficient aliasing Suppression This is also the rate of data received by LabOne Data Server and saved to the computer hard disk This setting has no impact on the sample rate on the auxiliary outputs connectors Note the value inserted by the user may be approximated to the nearest value supported by the instrument UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 109 4 2 Lock in Tab Demodulator Output Makes all demodulator output rates equal Rate Lock Pressing the lock copies the settings from demodulator one into the settings of all demodulators When the lock is pressed any modification to a field is immediately changing all other settings Releasing the lock does not change any setting and permits to individually adjust the demodulator output rate for each demodulator Trigger Continuous Selects continuous data acquisition mode
68. sample points taken for each sweep step as the maximum of the values number of samples Counts and time constants TC Also the filter settling time of each sweep point can by defined as the as the maximum of the values set in units of absolute time and atime derived from the targeted demodulator filter settling inaccuracy e g 1m for 0 1 Let s consider an example For a 4th order filter and a3 dB bandwidth set to 100 Hz we obtain a step response the arrives at 90 percent after about 4 5 ms This can be easily measured by using the SW Trigger as indicated in Figure 4 17 In case the full range is set to 1 V this means a measurement has a maximum error caused by imperfect settling of about 0 1 V However for most measurements the neighboring values are close compared to the full range and hence the real error caused is usually much smaller It is also important to understand that the filter time constant respectively the UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 145 4 9 Sweeper Tab 4 9 3 bandwidth and settling time can change over the course of a sweep e g for logarithmic sweeps with auto bandwidth adjust and hence the settling time as well as the number of samples per sweep point 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Demodulator 1 R l Y2 0 900 V Oe rh EEE EE E E EA E ee ee eee E EEE E a ee ee q E 0 900 V jat Jen Amplitude V 7 F X2 4 54 ms _ 4 53 ms i i
69. scope triggers i e changes from the Armed to the Active state The signal will normally have a very short duration and therefore it is shown with an arrow in the figure The duration can be increased by means of the Width input field which can be found next to the Output Signal selector on the DIO tab If Scope Trigger is selected then the same signal will appear on the output but it will simply be inverted logically Next if the Scope Armed source is selected the trigger output will be asserted as long as the Scope is in the Armed state Again this means that the Scope has recorded enough data to proceed with the acquisition and is waiting for the trigger condition to become satisfied In this example since a rising edge trigger is defined the trigger condition becomes satisfied when the input signal goes from below the trigger level to above the trigger level Similarly if Scope Armed is selected the trigger output will be asserted i e at logic 1 whenever the Scope is in a state different from the Armed state The same explanation holds for the remaining two configuration options except here the trigger output is asserted when the Scope is in the Active state or when it is not in the Active state Functional Elements Table 4 21 Scope tab Control sub tab Run Stop Runs the scope FFIT continuously Mode Switches between time and frequency domain Freq Domain FFT Freq Domain FFT FFT display Sampling Rate 27
70. suits the general specifications Do not block the ventilator opening on the back or the air intake on the side of the chassis and allow a reasonable space for the air to flow RJ45 plugs The two RJ45 plugs on the back panel labeled Peripheral ZCtrl are not intended for Ethernet LAN connection Connecting these plugs with an Ethernet device may damage the Instrument and or the Ethernet device Operation and storage Do not operate or store at a location outside the specified ambient conditions please refer to section Section 5 3 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 11 1 3 Handling and Safety Instructions Handling Do not throw the Instrument handle with due care do not store liquids on the device as there is a chance of spilling and damage When you notice any of the situations listed below immediately stop the operation of the Instrument disconnect the power cord and contact the support team at Zurich Instruments either through the website form or by emailat lt support zhinst com gt Table 1 3 Unusual Conditions Fan is not working properly or not at all Switch off the Instrument immediately to prevent overheating of sensitive electronic components Power cord or power plug on instrument is Switch off the Instrument immediately to prevent overheating electric shock or fire Please exchange the power cord with a quality product Instrument emits abnormal noise smell or Switch off the Ins
71. the filter bandwidth Length pts A Ou Zo Number of lines of the FFT spectrum A higher value increases the frequency resolution of the Spectrum Sampling Progress 0 to 100 The percentage of the FFT buffer already acquired Window Four different FFT windows to choose from Depending on the application it makes a huge difference which of the provided window function is used Please check the literature to find out the best trade off for your needs Avg Filter elects the type of averaging a the number of spectra which are averaged and displayed feet UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 142 4 8 Spectrum Analyzer Tab Resolution Hz MHz to AZ Spectral resolution defined by the reciprocal acquisition time sample rate number of samples recorded Overlap of demodulator data used for the FFT transform Use 0 for no overlap and 0 99 for maximal overlap Filter Compensation ON OFF Spectrum is corrected by demodulator filter transfer function Allows for quantitative comparison of amplitudes of different parts of the spectrum Absolute Frequency ON OFF Shifts x axis labeling to show the demodulation frequency in the center as opposed to 0 Hz when turned off Histogram ON OFF Shows the histogram in the display For the Math sub tab please see Table 4 7 in the section called Cursors and Math UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 143 4 9 Sweeper Tab 4 9
72. the pulse edges Use the horizontal zoom to zoom into one single period This can be done by rolling the mouse wheel forward to zoom in the horizontal axis To zoom in on the vertical axis press down the Shift key and roll the mouse wheel One can also recenter the waveform by pressing on the left mouse button and dragging the Scope plot area One can observe that the shape of the supposedly square pulse does not have square edges as one would expect This is due to the effect of the 600 MHz low pass filter at the input of the UHF UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 81 3 6 Tutorial PWA and Boxcar Averager In fact the signal input bandwidth of 600 MHz corresponds to about 1 5 ns rise time 20 80 Here the sampled pulse width shown in the Scope is measured to be about 29ns or 30 duty cycle The smeared out waveform has a duty cycle bigger than the 16 that was originally set l 84 0mV ihl A 0 1001V Amplitude mV Scope Channel 1 0 6137us A0 1021us Time us Figure 3 25 Digitized pulse waveform in Scope Low Duty Cycle Analysis with Period Waveform Analyzer To analyze the pulse waveform using the PWA the UHF first has to lock to the trigger signal of the pulses This is done using the Ext Ref mode of the UHF The trigger signal is fed to the Ref trigger connector on the front panel which can be an analog signal or a TTL signal The trigger level can be adjusted in the DIO tab as shown in Section 3 2 5
73. time Phase Unwrap ON OFF llows for unwrapping of slowly changing phase evolutions around the 180 degree boundary UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 149 4 9 Sweeper Tab a Density ON OFF Selects whether the result of the measurement Is normalized versus the demodulation bandwidth Sinc Filter ON OFF Enables sinc filter if sweep frequency is below 50 Hz Will improve the sweep speed at low frequencies as omega components do not need to be suppressed by the normal low pass filter Table 4 32 Sweeper tab History sub tab History History Each entry in the list corresponds to a single sweep in the history The number of displayed sweeps is limited to 20 Use the toggle buttons to hide display individual sweeps Use the color picker to change the color of a sweep Double click on an entry to edit its name Clear All Remove all records from the history list Select all records from the history list ne M Deselect all records from the history list Reference Use the selected trace as reference for all active traces Length integer valu Maximum number of entries stored in the measurement history The number of entries displayed in the list is limited to the most recent 100 ON OFF Enable disable the reference mode Referencename Referencename Name of the reference trace used Save Save Save all sweeps in the history to file Specify which device data to save in the Config tab F
74. time of 36 us at the highest sampling rate An FFT allows the analysis of the data set in the frequency domain The performance of the Scope is comparable to that of entry level GHz sampling rate oscilloscopes The Scope may be upgraded with the UHF DIG Digitizer option which enables two channels to be recorded in parallel increases the available memory to 128 MSa channel and allows recording of data in a segmented fashion The UHF DIG Digitizer option also enables a continuous recording mode with a sampling rate of up to 28 MSa s Features m One input channel with 64 kSa memory upgradable to two channels with 128 MSa memory per channel requires UHF DIG option m 12 biItnominal resolution m Fast Fourier Transform FFT up to 900 MHz span spectral density and power conversion choice of window functions Sampling rates from 27 kSa s to 1 8 GSa s up to 36 us acquisition time at 1 8 GSa s or 2 3 s at 2 kSa s m 8 signal sources including Signal Inputs and Trigger Inputs up to 8 trigger sources and 2 trigger methods m Independent hold off hysteresis pre trigger and trigger level settings m Support for Input Scaling and Input Units Simultaneous display of both input channels with up to 1 8 GSa s requires UHF DIG option m Segmented recording requires UHF DIG option m Continuous recording of both input channels at up to 7 MSa s over USB 14 MSa s over 1GbE and 28 MSa s over 10GbE requires UHF DIG option Description
75. to be detected a clock must be fed to the Instrument is external clock is selected If internal clock source is selected and the flag is still active then the situation might indicate a serious hardware failure in this case contact Zurich Instruments Supportteam at lt support zhinst com gt The user interface does not start or starts but remains idle verify that the ziServer HF2 Instrument LabOne Data Server UHF and LabOne Web Server UHF UHF Instrument have been started and are running on your host computer The user interface is slow and the web browser process consumes a lot of CPU power when the graphical hardware acceleration is disabled Make sure that the hardware acceleration is enabled for the web browser that is used for the user interface For the Windows operating system the hardware acceleration can be enabled in Control Panel Display Screen Resolution Go to Advanced Settings and then Trouble Shoot In case you use a NVIDIA graphics card you have to use the NVIDIA control panel Go to Manage 3D Settings then Program Settings and select the program that you want to customize Location of the log files For Windows 8 and Windows 7 the log files are located in the following directories bLabOne Data Server C Users USER AppData Local Temp Zurich Instruments LabOne ziDataServerLog m LabOne Web Server C Users USER AppData Local Temp Zurich Instruments LabOne ziWebServerLog ziServer HF2 Instrument m s
76. to distinguish if a device is just physically connected over USB or Ethernet or actively controlled be the LabOne Data Server In the first case the device is visible to the LabOne Data Server In the second case the device is connected logically Visible Devices A device is visible if the Data Server can identify it On a TCPIP network several PCs running a Data server will detect the same device as visible If a device is once discovered the server might initiate a connection to access the device and stream measurement data Only one single connection is allowed at the time Connected Device Once connected to a device the Data Server has exclusive access to data of that device If another Data Server from another PC already has an active connection to the device the device is still visible but cannot be connected by a second PC UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 30 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument It should be note here that although a Data Server has exclusive access to a connected device multiple browser and API client sessions still have simultaneous access and control over the device Therefore changes made to the settings of a device by say a Python session via the programming API will be seen by a browser session connected to that device The device data can be streamed to multiple client sessions simultaneously Universal Serial Bus USB Connection To control the device over USB connect the instrumen
77. upgrade as well Upgrading the firmware is described in detailin Section 1 6 The lowest layer running on the PC is the LabOne Data Server which is the interface to all the connected lock in amplifiers The middle layer consists of aLabOne Web Server which is the server for the web browser based LabOne User Interface In addition to a user interface the device can be controlled by custom software or other applications over the API layer The following sections explain the different layers and their functionality in more detail LabOne Data Server The LabOne Data Server can control a single or also multiple lock in amplifiers The devices are connected over USB or Ethernet interfaces An Ethernet connection to the instrument uses always both a TCP and UDP connection The UDP connection will transmit the high bandwidth data as for instance demodulator samples or scope data The LabOne Data Server will distribute the measurement data to all the clients that subscribe to it It also ensures that settings changed by one client are transferred to other clients The device settings are therefore synchronized on all clients On a PC only one single instance of a LabOne Data Server should be started If the server is configured to listen to other IP addresses than localhost it is possible to access measurement data from a different PC The data access to the device must always be performed over the LabOne Data Server LabOne Web Server The LabOne Web Serv
78. when the demodulation frequency is zero and the sampling rates match However since the spectrum analyzer tool operates on continuously transfered data samples it can acquire data for a extended period of time and therefore achieve very high frequency resolution which can also be calculated by taking the demodulator sampling rate divided by the number of recorded samples Since a complex FFT operation is applied the spectrum generally has positive and negative frequency components and is centered around zero Sometimes however it is convenient to shift the frequency axis by the demodulation frequency which allows to directly associate the measured frequency components to the signal present at the signal inputs on the front panel of the instrument This can be done by activating Absolute Frequency on the Settings sub tab Another important property of the spectrum is the fact that the data samples have passed a well defined low pass filter of a certain order and bandwidth This is most clearly resembled by the shape of the noise floor One has to take care that the selected frequency span which equals the demodulator sampling rate is in a healthy ratio with respect to the filter bandwidth and order When in doubt the user can always press the button labeled A next to the sampling rate in order to obtain a default setting that suits to the filter settings Other than displaying the frequency spectrum of the complex demodulator samples X iY the user can al
79. will control when the recording of both channels start The sampling rate and recording length settings are shared between both channels A single shot length of up to 128 MSa can be recorded Compared to the standard memory depth of 64 kSa this allows for longer recording times and FFTs with finer frequency resolution Additional input sources UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 128 4 6 Scope Tab Besides the Signal Input Trigger Input Auxiliary Input and Oscillator Phase the UHF DIG option also allows for recording of Demodulator PID Boxcar and Arithmetic Unit signals This functionality is very powerful in that it allows short bursts to be recorded with very high sampling rates In order to achieve the best possible utilization of the 12 bit scope sample resolution the upper and lower limit of these input signals should be specified Before sampling a scaling and an offset are applied to the input signal in order to get 12 bit resolution between the lower and upper limit The applied scaling and offset values are transferred together with the scope data which allows for full recovery of the original physical signal strength in absolute terms For directly sampled input signals like the Signal Inputs or Trigger Inputs the limits are read only values and reflect the selected input range Trigger gating With the UHF DIG option installed the user can make full use of the Trigger Engine which is sketched in Figure 2 4 If en
80. 0000000M 0 0000 E Sigin2 aj 100 Gy 1717k Continous Amp V 500 0n V ZoomFFT saw scope x Num x Plotter x AddRow x Presets Tree Settings Wag 37 Recon SW Trig i Demodulator 1 Frequency Sx Select a Preset I e Enabled Demods R in Out ge Enabled Demods Cartesian 8 Enabled Demods Polar To 20 Manual Aux 10 oio Signal Channel x zj JEET Debug Signal Display Groups Frequency A dev2006 demods 0 sample Freq Drop signal here to add a new group Wolas LE Time s Device dev2006 Session 1 2iDAQ setInt dev2006 extrefs 0 enable 1 ESSE P Pio mop Box RUB CAL CF ovi ovo pL s B Figure 3 8 Frequency tracking of an external reference signal over time with automatic bandwidth adjustment Providing the Reference Signal to Ref Trigger Input In this section you will slightly modify the setup to use Ref Trigger Input 1 instrument front side as a entry port for the external reference instead of Signal Input 1 A sketch of the modified setup is shown in Figure 3 9 Signal Output Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s Front Panel Aux Output 0000 Signal Input 00 O Ref Trigger BNC Figure 3 9 External reference using Ref Trigger Input 1 setup There are 2 Ref Trigger inputs on the front side of the instrument and two more on the rear side By using the dedicated trigger inputs both Signal Inputs remain available for simultaneous two input m
81. 00k Target BW Hz 10 00k 150 Lower Limit Hz 15 00k P Demodulator 200 Demodulator 1 Demod BW Hz 10 00k Demod BW Hz 1 000k Hr D Order 4 v Order 4 c 2 PID Settings oa g 10 Setpoint deg 0 000 g a X2 1 0000 fHz A 0 0000 fHz P Hz deg 48 99 P Hz deg 1 000 0 AT ee O Lonii Hz deg s 2 395k Hz deg s 0 000 D Hz deg s 0 000 D Hz deg s 0 000 D Limit TC s 0 000 FS 100 F Rate Hz 14 06M Rate Hz 14 06M FE Error PLL Lock 100 0m PM deg 90 00 L t li e th ht on Hai H H Freq Shift Hz 41 75m PLL BW Hz 63 80 v n 7 Fein E o BS GA lice Se Figure 4 27 LabOne Ul PLL tab Figure 4 28 shows a block diagram of the PLL with its components their interconnections and the variables to be specified by the user The demodulator and the PID controller are slightly simplified for this sketch Their full detailed block diagrams are given in Figure 4 6 and Figure 4 26 respectively Phase Locked Loop Demodulator PID Controller Mixer Low Pass Polar Signal Input Signal Output Order Phase Shift Phase Numeric Controlled Oscillator Figure 4 28 Phase Locked Loop block diagram components simplified In a typical work flow to setup a PLL one would first define the center frequency and the setpoint in the left section These values are often known or can be inferred by using the Sweeper or Spectrum tool Then a target bandwidth in the PLL Advisor can be set with a subsequ
82. 015 02 04 15 49 20 Sweep 2015 02 04 15 49 20 PWA 2014 09 04 09 58 12 New session with settings Default UI Figure 1 15 Dialog Device and Settings UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 21 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument The columns are described in Table 1 6 The table rows can be sorted by clicking on the column header that should be sorted The default sorting is by time Therefore the most recent settings are found on top Sorting the favorite marker or setting file name may be useful as well Table 1 6 Column Descriptions Star Allows favorite settings files to be grouped together By activating the stars adjacent to a settings files and clicking on the column heading the chosen files will be grouped together at the top or bottom of the list accordingly Subsequent clicks will toggle between the top and bottom of the list The favorite marker is saved to the settings file When the LabOne user interface is started next time the row will be marked as favorite again Name The name of the settings file In the file system the file name has the extension xml The date and time the settings file was last written Comment Allows a comment to be stored in the settings Tile By clicking on the comment field a text can be typed in which is subsequently stored in the settings file This comment is very useful to describe the specific conditions of ameasurement The comment can be added at any time Special
83. 2 Inputs Outputs Tab The In Out tab is mainly a settings tabs and is available in all UHF Instruments 4 12 1 Features m Signal input configuration m Signal output configuration 4 12 2 Description The In Out tab provides access to the same sections as the left and the right most on the Lock in tab It is mainly intended to be used on small screens that can not show all the sections of the lock in tab simultaneously Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 37 a icon and short description In Out Access to all controls relevant for the main Signal Inputs and Signal Outputs on the instrument s front The In Out tab see Figure 4 20 is divided into two sections one for the signal inputs and one for signal outputs all four located on the Instrument front panel Config x Device X Aux X Lock in X In Out X AddRow x Signal Inputs Output Amplitudes Signal Outputs Input 1 Amp 1 Vpk Amp 2 Vpk Output 1 Range 100 0m iJ 100 0m o 100 0m On 500 el Scaling 1 VIN 100 0m 100 0m Range 15V v ac Bs 0 ad 100 0m ey 100 0m ey Offset V 0 000 100 0m g 100 0m Input 2 100 0m 100 0m Output 2 8 O N Oo F amp F WN KF Range 1 0 Fa seca 100 0m ey 100 0m ay On 500 fej Scaling 1 viv oF 100 0m 100 0m Range 15V ac Bs 0 50 100 0m ay 100 0m Ey Offset V 0 000 Figure 4 20 LabOne UI Inputs Outputs tab 4 12 3 Functional El
84. 3 SOSSE Zurich Instruments Auto Start ay Server Connectivity 127 0 0 1 8004 Available Devices bo En Device Interface Status a DEV2009 SbE Saved Settings Name Date vy Comment yr last_session_Pil 2015 03 11 15 39 44 yy test 2015 03 11 12 56 04 basic setup Mod 2015 02 04 15 49 20 t Num 2015 02 04 15 49 20 PII 2015 02 04 15 49 20 Scope 2015 02 04 15 49 20 Sweep 2015 02 04 15 49 20 PWA 2014 09 04 09 58 12 Info No device available Info Some devices need a FW upgrade Please follow the steps described in the help New session with settings Figure 1 14 Message FW Upgrade Needed Saved Settings Device amp UI UI Only Default UI Settings files can contain both UI and device settings UI settings control the structure of the LabOne User Interface e g the position and ordering of opened tabs Device settings specify the set up of a device The device settings persist on the device until the next power off or until overwritten by loading another settings Tile Device and Settings LabOne User Interface Version 15 01 287 SSA o N Zurich Instruments Auto Start ay Server Connectivity 127 0 0 1 8004 Available Devices gt A En Device Interface Status a g vev2009 USB Connected Ot i Saved Settings Name Date vy Comment yr last_session_PII 2015 03 11 15 39 44 yy test 2015 03 11 12 56 04 basic setup Jr Mod 2015 02 04 15 49 20 Num 2015 02 04 15 49 20 PII 2015 02 04 15 49 20 Scope 2
85. 5 kSa Defines the sampling rate of the scope s to 1 8 GSa s UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 131 4 6 Scope Tab Length Mode Length pts The scope shot length is defined in number of samples The duration is given by the number of samples divided by the sampling rate The UHF DIG option greatly increases the available length Duration s The scope shot length is defined as a duration The number of samples is given by the duration times the sampling rate Length pts or numeric value Defines the length of the recorded scope shot Duration s Use the Length Mode to switch between length and duration display lar Window Four different FFT windows to choose from Each window function results in a different trade off between amplitude accuracy and spectral leakage Please check the literature to find the window function that best suits your needs Resolution Hz MHz to Hz Spectral resolution defined by the reciprocal acquisition time sample rate number of samples recorded Channel 1 2 Signal Inputs Selects the source for scope channel Navigate Trigger Inputs Auxiliary Inputs Demodulator Oscillator Phase Demodulator X Y R Theta PID Boxcar AU through the tree view that appears and click on numeric value Lower limit of the scope full scale range For demodulator PID Boxcar and AU signals the limit should be adjusted so that the signal covers the specified range to achieve optimal resol
86. 5V 25Vv 5 V 5 V and Trigger In back panel high input impedance ee hai come rows ee ees ZS NY VHz output impedance front and back 50 O panel output level front and back panel E 33 VITE internal reference mode output of frequency range imHz 600 MHz reference on UHF outputs reren orthogonality reference instantaneous acquisition time lock time UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 201 5 2 Analog Interface Specifications internal reference mode output of frequency range imHz 200 MHz reference on Ref Trigger reference orthogonality reference instantaneous acquisition time lock time external reference mode and auto frequency range 10Hz 600 MHz reference mode reference input at amplitude note 100 mV signal Input 1 and 2 for low swing input signals the gain should be set to full swing range to achieve best performance amplitude using 10 mV UHF PID option note for low swing input signals the gain should be set to full swing range to achieve best performance reference 100 acquisition time reference lock time cycles or 12 mis whatever is larger external reference mode reference signal type arbitrary arbitrary active at rising edge at rising arbitrary active at rising edge input at Ref Trigger frequency range 10Hz 600 MHz reference 100 acquisition time reference lock time cycle
87. Also Noise Equivalent Power Bandwidth Bayonet Neill Concelman Connector Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments L13 CF Common Mode Rejection Ratio CMRR CSV D A DAC DC DDS DHCP DIO DNS DSP DUT Dynamic Reserve DR XML FFT FIFO FM Frequency Accuracy FA Frequency Modulated AFM FM AFM UHF User Manual Clock Fail internal processor clock missing Specification of a differential amplifier or other device indicating the ability of an amplifier to obtain the difference between two inputs while rejecting the components that do not differ from the signal common mode A high CMRR is important in applications where the signal of interest is represented by a small voltage fluctuation superimposed on a possibly large voltage offset or when relevant information is contained in the voltage difference between two signals The simplest mathematical definition of common mode rejection ratio is CMRR 20 log differential gain common mode gain Comma Separated Values Digital to Analog Digital to Analog Converter Direct Current Direct Digital Synthesis Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Digital Input Output Domain Name Server Digital Signal Processor Device Under Test The measure of a lock in amplifier s capability to withstand the disturbing signals and noise at non reference frequencies while maintaining the specified measurement accuracy within the signal bandwidth Extensible Markup Langu
88. Architecture The following steps are required to start a new session 1 Select a LabOne Data Server The default address 127 0 0 1 8004 uses the local server 2 Select a device If not connected the device will be connected at session start 3 Select a setting file unless the default user interface is used 4 Start the session by pressing Device amp UI UI Only or Default UI If there are no setting files listed starting the LabOne User Interface by pressing the button Default UI will start a session using factory defaults The following sections describe the steps in detail If failures are detected further dialogs are shown Server Connectivity The standard LabOne Data Server is expected under the localhost address 127 0 0 1 and port 8004 Use the Change button to connect to a different LabOne Data Server If the LabOne Data Server is not accessible under the given address the dialogin Figure 1 10 will be shown to specify the address UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 23 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument LabOne Data Server Connect LabOne User Interface en Oe in N S A Name Port Number N 127 0 0 1 8004 Zurich Instruments Info No LabOne Data Server connection available Please enter new data server address and click connect Previous Session Error Closing session 3 due to page unload Figure 1 10 Dialog LabOne Data Server Connect Available Devices The Available Devices box is
89. C 17 7X13 6xX 3 9 inch 19 inch rack compatible recommended calibration interval Table 5 2 Maximum ratings damage threshold Ref Trigger 1 and 2 damage threshold Tregroes w o aarage threshold Triggerintand2 e ov damage threshold AuxOutput 2 5 4 ox ov damaeetmresroaaon iana ow o ov damage threshold DIO digital 1 0 ow e e damage threshold Clk In and Clk Out Table 5 3 Host computer requirements 32 bit and 64 bit versions of XP Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 supported Linux distribution 32 bit and 64 bit of Linux Ubuntu T204 LTISU366 AMD64 64 bit systems require the IA32 extension minimum host computer requirements for low bandwidth Windows XP 32 bit data transfer UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 197 5 1 General Specifications Dual Core CPU with SSE2 Support 4 GB DRAM 1 Gbit s Ethernet controller recommended host computer requirements Windows 7 64 bit or Linux 64 bit Quad Core CPU i7 or better 8 GB DRAM or better 1 Gbit s Ethernet controller with receive side scaling and Jumbo Frame support 9k high data transfer rates can be obtained by using for instance Intel Ethernet Server Adapter 210 1 SSD HD drive for high bandwidth data saving Supported processors requiring SSE2 AMD K8 Athlon 64 Sempron 64 Turion 64 etc AMD Phenom Intel Pentium 4 Xeon Celeron Celeron D Pentium M Celeron M Core Core 2 Core 15 Core 17 Atom
90. DC Alternate Current Analog to Digital Converter Amplitude Modulation AFM mode where the amplitude change between drive and measured signal encodes the topography or the measured AFM variable see Also Atomic Force Microscope Application Programming Interface American Standard Code for Information Interchange Microscope that scans surfaces by means an oscillating mechanical structure e g cantilever tuning fork whose oscillating tip gets so close to the surface to enter in interaction because of electrostatic chemical magnetic or other forces With an AFM it is possible to produce images with atomic resolution see Also Amplitude Modulated AFM Frequency Modulated AFM Phase modulation AFM Allen Variance The signal bandwidth represents the highest frequency components of interest in a signal For filters the signal bandwidth is the cut off point where the transfer function of a system shows 3 dB attenuation versus DC In this context the bandwidth is a synonym of cut off frequency feut off OF 3dB frequency f 3gg The concept of bandwidth is used when the dynamic behavior of a signal is important or separation of different signals is required In the context of a open loop or closed loop system the bandwidth can be used to indicate the fastest speed of the system or the highest signal update change rate that is possible with the system Sometimes the term bandwidth is erroneously used as synonym of frequency range see
91. Demodulator 3 Enabled Demods Cartesian R 35 11934mV 13 10004 deg Manual a cerne nereeereneeee 0 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 100 0 100 Figure 3 15 Numerical results of AM demodulation under the Numeric tab Note UHF User Manual By selecting Enable Demod Polar in the Numeric tab only the enabled demodulator outputs will show If we take the sum of the double sidebands amplitude i e demodulator 2 and 3 and divide it by the amplitude of the carrier demodulator 1 we will get an AM modulation index of h Agigeband Acarrier 0 2 This is exactly the index we had used to generate the AM signal in the MOD tab Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 71 3 4 Tutorial Phase locked Loop 3 4 Tutorial Phase locked Loop 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 Note This tutorialis applicable to UHF Instruments having the UHF PID Quad PID PLL Controller option installed Goals and Requirements This tutorial explains how to track the resonance frequency shift of a resonator using the PLL To perform this tutorial one simply needs to connect a resonator between Signal Output 2 to Signal Input 2 Preparation Connect the cables and the resonator as shown in the diagram below Make sure the UHFLI is powered on and then connect the UHFLI through the USB to your PC or to your local area network LAN where the host computer resides After starting LabOne the default web browser opens with the LabOne graphical user interface UH Lock in Ampli
92. Device ON OFF Enable save load of device settings Include UI ON OFF Enable save load of user interface settings Load Preferences ON OFF Enable loading of user preferences from settings file Load the user interface and device setting from a Display Theme Choose theme of the user interface Print Theme Light Choose theme for printing SVG plots a Grid Dashed Select active grid setting for all graphs Solid None Show Shortcuts ON OFF Displays a list of keyboard and mouse wheel shortcuts for manipulating plots Dynamic Tabs ON OFF If enabled sections inside the application tabs are collapsed automatically depending on the window width L Log Format Choose the command log format See status bar and User Documents Zurich Instruments LabOne WebServer Log CSV Delimiter Select which delimiter to insert for CSV files Semicolon Tab Auto Start ON OFF Skip session dialog at startup if selected device is available In case of an error or disconnected device the session dialog will be reactivated Record ON OFF Start and stop saving data to disk as defined in the selection filter Matlab Data format of recorded data CSV Folder path indicating Folder containing the saved data file location integer number Cumulated size of saved data Format N 09 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 163 4 14 Config Tab For the tree functionality in the Record Data section please see
93. H9018BNAJ Full computer name WIN HDH9018BNAJ omputer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name WIN 6DN4NE7UETH a Full computer name WIN 6DN4NE7UETH Computer description Workgroup WORKGROUP f Computer description RER Workgroup WORKGROUP Windows activation Product ID UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 13 1 4 Software Installation Windows 7 32 bit x86 Windows NET Framework Requirement Windows 7 64 bit x64 The Zurich Instruments software requires the Microsoft NET Framework to be installed on the host computer This is the case for 95 of the computers The installation of LabOne will fail if this is not the case It is possible to check the installation of the Microsoft NET Framework under Windows Start Control panel Add and Remove Programs The minimum requirement is Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 Service Pack 1 In case the required version is not installed it can be installed through Windows Update tool Windows Start Control panel Windows Update Microsoft Windows Update Windows Internet Explorer 6 i D www update microsoft com z gt lt a8 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help x Google ly Favorites Microsoft Windows Update x w v J Search gt fil Gh Share A Check gt Translate A amp ay Windows Windows Update Windows Family Windows Marketplace Office Family Windo
94. L specification ZCtrl peripheral port 2 connectors for Zl proprietary bus to control external peripherals 9 3 1 DIO Port The DIO port is a VHDCI 68 pin connector as introduced by the SPI 3 document of the SCSI 3 specification It is a female connector that requires a 32 mm wide male connector The DIO port features 32 bits that can be configured byte wise as inputs or outputs 37 70 CIRCUIT 34 Di AS 0 80 TYP CIRCUIT 1 L S NYL z z D I 6 28 CIRCUIT 68 CIRCUIT 35 J233 41 90 Figure 5 1 DIO HD 68 pin connector Table 5 12 DIO pin assignment clock input used to latch S VCMOSATLE signals at the digital input ports can also be used to retrieve digital signals from the output port using an external sampling clock DIO output latch 56 25 MHz 9 V CMOS clock signal the digital outputs are synchronized to the falling edge of this signal digital input or output CMOS 5 V output set by user input is CMOS TTL UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 2095 5 3 Digital Interface Specifications 08 5 DIO 23 16 digital input or output CMOS 5 V output set by user input is CMOS TTL 50 43 DIO 15 8 digital input or output CMOS 5V output set by user input is CMOS TTL 42 35 DIOL digital input or SULDULEMIOS 3 V output set by user input is CMOS TTL The figure below shows the architecture of the DIO input output The DIO port features 32 bits that can be configured byte wise as inputs or
95. LED gsreen red When green the PLL Advisor found a stable solution with the given settings When red revise your settings and rerun the PLL Advisor PLL BW Hz numeric value Simulated bandwidth of the PLL with the current settings The bandwidth is roughly equal to the locking range of the PLL Model BW LED green red Red indicates the simulated PLL BW is smaller than the Target BW TOPEL To PLL Copy the PLL Advisor settings to the PLL PLL Advisor proportional gain P UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 181 4 18 MOD Tab 4 18 MOD Tab The MOD tab relates to the UHF MOD AM FM Modulation option and is only available if this option is installed on the UHF Instrument see Information section in the Device tab Note The UHF MOD AM FM Modulation option requires that the UHF MF Multi frequency option to be activated 4 18 1 Features m Phase coherently add and subtract oscillator frequencies and their multiples Control for AM and FM demodulation Control for AM and narrow band FM generation m Direct analysis of higher order carrier frequencies and sidebands 4 18 2 Description The MOD tab offers control in order to phase coherently add and subtract the frequencies of multiple numerical oscillators Whenever closed or anew instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 49 cpp icon and short description Control panel to enable de modulation at linear
96. Nichols method the Tyreus Luyben method and the damped oscillation method The open loop tuning methods are for example the open loop UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 77 3 5 Tutorial Automatic Gain Control Ziegler Nichols method the C H R method the Cohen and Coon method the Fertik method the Ciancone Marline method the IMC method and the minimum error criteria methods The Good Gain method has the merit of being easily observable There are only a few steps to follow using this PID tuning method iF Enable the PID We are initially trying to manually adjust the system in open loop such that the controlled signal is close to its final value Set all P and D values to zero Increase P gradually until you get a slight overshoot in the step response This is done by manually adjust the set point and observe the controlled signal response You should now observe the error between the measurement and the set point value getting smaller and smaller as P increases Note that with the P controller one can get close but never exactly to the final setpoint value Make sure that the PID input or output is not unintentionally soft limited in minimum or maximum values e g limited in amplitude frequency etc Note The Plotter tool is a very good way to observe the step response while adjusting the PID gain parameters as shown below QE Config x Aux x Lock in x PID x AddRow x m 1 PID3 558 2 Enable g Rate
97. Output 1 3 By default all physical outputs of the UHF are inactive to prevent damage to connected circuits Now it is time to turn on the main output switch by clicking on the button labeled On The switch turns to blue indicates now On 4 Ifyou have an oscilloscope connected to the setup you should now be able to see the generated signal Table 3 1 quickly summarizes the instrument settings to be made Table 3 1 Settings generate the reference signal 3 1 4 Check the Test Input Signal Next you adjust the input parameters range impedance and coupling to match the following values Table 3 2 Sid Oe D the reference signal The range setting ensures that the analog amplification on the Signal Input 1 is set such that the dynamic range of the input high speed digitizer is optimal without clipping the signal The graphical range indicator next to the numerical range setting shows about 50 usage of the possible dynamic range The incoming signal can now be observed over time by using the Scope Tab A Scope view can be placed in the web browser by clicking on the icon in the left sidebar or by dragging the Scope Icon to one of the open Tab Rows Choose the following settings on the Scope Tab to display the signal entering Signal Input 1 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 57 3 1 Tutorial Simple Loop Si oy Table 3 3 Settings generate the reference signal Scope rigger enable fon Scope reer
98. Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 31 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument ae LabOne Data Server UHF Properties atibilit Previous Versions Shorout Fort 1s oo 5 at 4 LabOne Data Server UHF Target type Application Target location DataServer Target ita Server ziDataServer exe auto connect off Start in C Program Files urch Instruments LabOne Dz Shortcut key None Figure 1 17 auto connect Device Discovery TCP IP 1GbE Various methods are possible for connecting to the device via TCP IP multicast DHCP simplest method m Multicast point to point P2P Static P The sample transfer performance of different connections varies greatly Generally it can be stated that a point to point connection will lead to larger transfer rates compared to a network based connection at the expense of more complexity in the connection For very high sample transfer rates one must consider advanced network configurations that might be in contradiction with the local policies e g the enabling of Jumbo frames Note To use the device exclusively over the Ethernet interface modify the shortcut of the LabOne User Interface UHF and LabOne Data Server UHF in the Windows Start menu Right click and go to Properties then add the following command line argument to the Target field interface usb false interface ip true Multicast DHCP UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments OZ 1 5 Connecti
99. Scope window can display up to 64k points samples on the web browser For the full description of the Scope tool please refer to the functional description Measure the Test Input Signal Now you are ready to use UHFLI to demodulate the input signal and measure its amplitude and phase You will use two tools of the LabOne User Interface Numerical and the Plotter First adjust the following parameters on the Lock in Tab for demodulator 1 or choose another demodulator if desired Table 3 4 Settings generate the reference signal Esckcin Demedulators i Phase DS UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 58 3 1 Tutorial Simple Loop order pusara Lock in Demodulators Rate 100 Sample s automatically adjusted to 107 Sample s These above settings configure the demodulation filter to the third order low pass operation with a 9 ms integration time constant Alternatively the corresponding bandwidths BW NEP or BW 3 dB can be displayed and entered The output of the demodulator filter is read out at a rate of 107 Hz implying that 107 data samples are sent to the host PC per second with equidistant spacing These samples can be viewed in the Numerical and the Plotter tool which we will examine now The Numerical tool provides the space for 16 or more measurement panels Each of the panels has the option to display the samples in the Cartesian X Y or in the polar format R O plus other quantities such as the
100. Signal Output 2 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 111 4 3 Lock in MF Tab 4 3 Lock in MF Tab 4 3 1 4 3 2 UHF User Manual This tab is the main lock in amplifier control panel for all instruments with the multi frequency option UHF MF installed Users with instruments without this option installed are kindly referred to Section 4 2 Features Control for 2 separate lock in units with 8 demodulators in total m Auto ranging scaling arbitrary input units for both input channels Control for 8 oscillators m Range setting for signal inputs and signal outputs m Flexible choice of reference source trigger options and data transfer rates Description The lock in tab is the main control center of the instrument and open after start up by default Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 12 App icon and short description Lock in MF Quick overview and access to all the settings and properties for signal generation and demodulation The Signal Inputs section on the left and the Signal Outputs section on the right of Lock in tab see Figure 4 7 are horizontally divided into two identical sections The upper section is related to Signal Input 1 and Signal Output 1 and the lower section to Signal Input 2 and Signal Output 2 i e the main BNC connectors on the front side of the instrument The two input channels and outp
101. T of the oscillator frequency of the selected demodulator This mode is only interesting if the oscillator is controlled by a PID PLL controller The FFT is single sided as performed on real data FFT dO dt FFT of the demodulator phase derivative This value is equivalent to the frequency noise observed on the demodulated signal The FFT is single sided as performed on real data Power ON OFF Calculate and show the power value To extract power spectral density PSD this button should be enabled together with spectral density Spectral Density ON OFF Calculate and show the spectral density If power is enabled the power spectral density value is calculated The spectral density is used to analyze noise Sample Rate Hz numeric value Equivalent to sampling rate of demodulator The resulting frequency span is equal to the sample rate Increase the sample rate to reduce aliasing Auto Automatic adjustment of the sampling rate The rate will be selected to achieve good enough anti aliasing for the selected demodulator bandwidth Center Freq Hz numeric value Demodulation frequency of the selected demodulator used as input for the spectrum For complex FFT X iY the demodulation frequency defines the center frequency of the displayed Fed Aliasing Reject dB numeric value Resulting aliasing rejection based on demodulator sampling rate and low pass filter settings If the value is too low either increase the sampling rate or lower
102. Table 4 8 in the section called Tree Sub Tab UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 164 4 15 Device Tab 4 15 Device Tab The Device tab is the main settings tab for the connected instrument and is available in all UHF Instruments 4 15 1 Features Option and upgrade management m External clock referencing 10 MHz m Auto calibration settings m Instrument connectivity parameters m Device monitor 4 15 2 Description The Device tab serves mainly as a control panel for all settings specific to the Instrument that is controlled by LabOne in this particular session Whenever closed or a new instance Is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 42 App icon and short description Device Provides instrument specific settings eee The Device tab see Figure 4 24 is divided into four section general instrument information configuration network related communication parameters and a device monitor Config x Device XxX Aux X Lock in X Add Row x Information Configuration Communication Statistics Device Monitor Device ID Options Settings Current Configuration E b iege a aei E besom enon epa et i a Serial 2044 Installed MF Clock Source Internal y Interface USB Command Communication FPGA Temp 70 0 C AnalogTempO 41 3 C Type UHFLI SPAL A Jumbo Frames IP4 Address 10 42 3 112 Pending 255 FPGA Core 1 00 V AnalogTemp1 43 0 C BOX Processing 1 FPGA Aux 2
103. UHF User Manual NAVI 4 4 N Zurich Instruments UHF User Manual Zurich Instruments AG Publication date Revision 28900 Copyright 2008 2015 Zurich Instruments AG The contents of this document are provided by Zurich Instruments AG ZI as is ZI makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this publication and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice LabVIEW is a registered trademark of National Instruments Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Revision History Revision 28900 18 Mar 2015 Document update of all chapters to comply with the changes of the 15 01 product release Highlights of the changes and additions to the UHFLI product are Specification change typical input noise at 100 kHz is now 4 nV VHz previously 5 nV VHz Sweeper Indicator for estimated sweep time PID PID advisor with auto tune AU Support of multiplication AU Support of boxcar data Scope Spectral Density for FFT of Scope Data Scope Support of different FFT window functions NEW Option UHF DIG Digitizer Scope enhancement with continuous scope streaming Scope trigger output on Trigger 1 2 Gated triggering Hold off specified as number of trigger events Support of boxcar demodulator and pid data recording Cross domain triggering for scope based on boxcar demodulator and p
104. aa input full range sensitivity 10 V lock in 1 nV Ron s amplifier output Ca couine esv osv AC coupling cutoff frequency 50Q termination 320 kHz o 1MQ termination BoHz pom 10 inpatampitudestabity O J oo oe with respect to range L L input harmonic distortion HD2 HD3 1 Vpp 500 7 5 dB termination 10 minutes after manual input calibration lt 1 MHz come ne come os pome sos amers os 00 Table 5 6 UHF signal outputs connectors E BNC front panel single ended input range AC common mode DC coupling A5 fo eroro Fo y o o f STC output requeneyrange EO e YS i ooe UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 200 5 2 Analog Interface Specifications output frequency resolution Re output phase resolution Re output D A conversion 14 bit 1 8 GSa s output amplitude ranges Re ETOM gat gO utputpower OP output amplitude accuracy lt 100 MHz gt 100 MHz output harmonic distortion HD2 HD3 1 Vop 50 Q termination lt 1 MHz 2 5 lt 100 MHz gt 100 MHz output noise amplitude gt 100 kHz output phase noise 10 MHz BW 0 67 Hz offset 100 Hz dBc Hz 10 MHz BW 0 67 130 Hz offset 1 kHz dBc Hz Table 5 7 Reference signals and reference modes connectors BNC front panel bidirectional SMA back panel input SMA back panel output input level at Ref Trigger front panel low input impedance 2
105. abOne User Interface Uninstalling LabOne on Linux The LabOne software package copies an uninstall script to the base installation path the default installation directory is opt zi To uninstall the LabOne package please perform the following steps in a command line shell 1 Navigate to the path where LabOne is installed for example if LabOne is installed in the default installation path ca opt ziy UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 17 1 4 Software Installation 2 Run the uninstall script with administrator rights and proceed through the guided steps sudo bash uninstall LabOne lt arch gt lt release gt lt revison gt sh UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument 1 9 1 ors After the LabOne software has been installed the UHF instrument can be connected to a PC by using either the USB cable the 1 Gbit s 1GbE Ethernet LAN cable or the 10 Gbit s 10GbE cable supplied with the instrument Using the LAN connection is particularly straight forward when DHCP IP address allocation is activated in the network e g by using a switch Direct point to point connection can also be used The 10GbE cable and module are only available when the associated option UHF 10G was purchased Controlling the instrument from the PC Your Zurich Instruments lock in amplifier can be accessed by several software clients simultaneou
106. able 4 45 DUT transfer functions Tes uOe Low pass _ l n 1 Gain g NLS ay rarer ta eee ioe coed ear 2 Filter bandwidth BW Lam cw 2x Low pass HO co 1 Gain g 2nd 8 24 2o St O 2 Resonance frequency Ta ow 27 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments Z 4 16 PID Tab Name Function Parameters 3 Damping ratio with I 3dB 2f res Resonator s jl th 1 20 1 Resonance Hs 7 wi po ae frequency tost1 ee a Ala frequency f 2 Quality factor Q Resonator 1 Gain g w S amplitude H s g rs Q with res 27 f es 2 Resonance frequency Ta 3 Quality factor Q Internal 360 1 none met em VCO 1 Gain g H2 V 2 Bandwidth BW 34 52 Wes O SEs Note It is generally recommended to use the Advise feature in a stepwise approach where one increases the free parameter from PI to PID and then to PIDF This helps to avoid optimizing into local minima and sometimes requires less time Also it can be quite illustrative which part of the loop filter leads to which effect Note The low pass filter in the differential part is implemented as an exponential moving average filter described by y a y Fax with a 248ml The default value for dshift is 0 i e no averaging or unity filter transfer function On the UI the filter properties can conveniently be changed in units of bandwidth or a time constant In particular when the feedback is provided to sensitive external equi
107. abled trigger gating will only trigger the scope recording if the gating input is active Additional trigger input sources By using a Demodulator PID Boxcar or Arithmetic Unit signal as trigger source the Scope can be used in a cross domain triggering mode This allows for example for time domain signals to be recorded in a synchronous fashion triggered by the result from analyzing a signal in the frequency domain by means of a demodulator Note Adjust a negative delay pre trigger to compensate for the delay of the Demodulator PID Boxcar or Arithmetic Unit Segmented data recording The scope sends the result of each shot to the PC over either the TCPIP or the USB interface which both have limited data transfer bandwidth As a consequence a holdoff time is required between individual scope shots to allow the recorded data to be transferred to the PC The segmented data recording mode can be enabled if the user requires a minimum holdoff time between shots The mode allows a burst of up to 32 768 scope shots called segments to be recorded into the device memory The holdoff time in this mode can be less than 100 us between each shot because the Scope does not have to wait for the data transfer to complete before the next shot can be started The segmented data recording is most powerful when used over the API The data of each shot will contain information on the segment number Continuous Scope data streaming Normal scope op
108. accuracy 0 4 aging ppom year short term stability 0 00005 1 s ppm short term stability 0 0005 100 s pom UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 203 5 2 Analog Interface Specifications temperature coefficient 23 5 phase noise at 100 Hz ohase noise at 1 kHz warm up time UHF RUB Rubidium clock option initial accuracy at 25 a 0 03 ppm X lt n p cr lt 130 dBc Hz 140 dBc Hz 60s 0 0005 ppm 0 000005 ppm day long term accuracy aging 0 0005 pom year short term stability 0 00008 AVAR 1 s ppm short term stability 0 000008 AVAR 100 s temperature coefficient 25 0 0005 ppm 29 phase noise at 100 Hz ohase noise at 1 warm up time 140 dBc Hz L N 300 s 257 clock input connector SMA on back panel impedance 50 O amplitude 200 mV 320 mV TV frequency 9 98 MHz 10 MHz 10 02 MHz clock output connector SMA on back pane impedance amplitude 50 Q frequency O O 3 500 250 mV 1 V O N UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 2 5 3 Digital Interface Specifications 5 3 Digital Interface Specifications Table 5 11 Digital interfaces Parameter Description host computer connection USB 2 0 high speed 480 Mbit s 1GbE LAN Ethernet 1 Gbit s 1OGbE LAN Ethernet 10 Gbit s option DIO port 4x8 bit general purpose digital input output port 5V TT
109. adapting to many needs of the users For each demodulator an additional phase shift can be introduced to the associated oscillator by entering the phase offset in the Phase column This phase is added both to the reference channel and the output of the demodulator Hence when the frequency Is generated and detected using the same demodulator signal phase and reference phase change by the same amount and no change will be visible in the demodulation result Demodulation of frequencies that are integer multiples of any of the oscillator frequencies is achieved by entering the desired factor in the Harm column The demodulator readout can be obtained using the Numeric tab which is described in section 4 4 In the middle of the Lock in tab is the Low Pass Filters section where the filter order can be selected in the drop down list for each demodulator and the filter bandwidth BW 3dB can chosen by typing anumerical value Alternatively the time constant of the filter TC or the noise equivalent power filter bandwidth BW NEP can be chosen by clicking on the column s header For example setting the filter order to 4 corresponds to a roll off of 24 dB oct or 80 dB dec i e an attenuation of 10 for a tenfold frequency increase If the Low Pass Filter bandwidth is comparable to or larger than the demodulation frequency the demodulator output may contain frequency components at the frequency of demodulation and its higher harmonics In this case the addi
110. age See Also XML Fast Fourier Transform First In First Out Frequency Modulation Measure of an instrument s ability to faithfully indicate the correct frequency versus a traceable standard AFM mode where the frequency change between drive and measured signal encodes the topography or the measured AFM variable see Also Atomic Force Microscope Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 214 Frequency Response Analyzer FRA Frequency Sweeper G Gain Phase Meter GPIB GUI I O Impedance Spectroscope IS Input Amplitude Accuracy IAA Input voltage noise IVN IP L LAN LED Lock in Amplifier LI LIA M Media Access Control address MAC address Multi frequency MF UHF User Manual Instrument capable to stimulate a device under test and plot the frequency response over a selectable frequency range with a fine granularity See Also Frequency Response Analyzer See Also Vector Network Analyzer General Purpose Interface Bus Graphical User Interface Input Output Instrument suited to stimulate a device under test and to measure the impedance by means of a current measurement at a selectable frequency and its amplitude and phase change over time The output is both amplitude and phase information referred to the stimulus signal Measure of instrument s capability to faithfully indicate the signal amplitude at the input channel versus a traceable standard Total noise generated by the in
111. ain Control AGC Tutorial 76 Auxiliary Input Back panel 51 Specifications 203 Auxiliary Output Front panel 49 Specifications 203 Auxiliary Tab 154 B Back panel 51 Bandwidth Demodulator Specifications 203 Boxcar Block diagram 189 Description 187 Tutorial 80 Boxcar Tab 187 C Calibration 9 Calibration factory 9 42 Calibration self see Self Calibration Clock 10 MHz Back panel 51 Performance 211 Computer requirements 197 Config Tab 161 Coupling AG 105 TIS Cursors Description 100 D Damage threshold 197 Demodulator Block diagram 106 Specifications 202 Demodulator settling time UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Measurement carried out with the SW Trigger to illustrate the settling time for a 4th order filter with a 3 dB bandwidth set to 100 Hz 146 Device Tab 165 Digital Interface Specifications 205 DIO Back panel 51 Specifications 205 DIO Tab 158 Dynamic reserve Specifications 200 E Earth ground Back panel 51 External reference Tutorial 61 F Filter order Specifications 203 Filter roll off Specifications 203 Frequency range Specifications 200 Frequency resolution Specifications 201 Front panel 49 Full range sensitivity Specifications 200 G Gain accuracy Specifications 201 Group delay Specifications 203 H Harmonic rejection Specifications 203 Host requirements 197 Impedance Input 105 TIS Inputs Outputs Tab 157 Inst
112. ain PWA for peak analysis Lastly the frequency of 9 7 MHz is not chosen accidentally In general one should avoid choosing a modulation frequency that shares the same divisor as the maximum UHF BOX repetition rate of 450 MHz i e the two numbers should not be commensurable For example 10 MHz and 450 MHz are commensurable since they can be both divided by 10 This commensurability issue arises from the internal UHF sampling effect which may cause certain bins to get filled constantly but not others Such an example is shown in the figure below Ared warning indicator will be switched on when a potential commensurability problem is detected 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 PWA Boxcar Baseline Math l g aooo E enV ae Recording 2 jii A 83 6mV N Signal Input 2 tha er Input Signal Sigin 1 v E 60 Input PWA 1 Waveform 154 6deg Ose A 9 9deg Frequency Hz 10 000005004 Has gt 40 F Horizontal Axis Phase Pa Mode Zoom v 20 Start Phase deg 0 000 0 5 J Width deg 360 000 0 L 0 0000V i asiaasi i a j danni ibama a bami ieoi daan j iaa O Samples 2 09716M Fe Acq Time s 4 660m Vertical Signal Waveform cay Sa D aN OO OD OD TOT OO OO TO TO TOO TO YN QT GT TG VE TY SOC TO VT OY OS TOY YY YO SY YO OD TO TS TO e 50 100 5 a a z Phase deg Pa a OS S Figure 3 28 Problem of commensurability with the choice of the modulation frequency Low Duty Cycle Analysis with Scope T
113. allation Linux t6 Windows 13 L Linux Software Installation 16 Lock in MF Tab 112 Zurich Instruments 219 Lock in Tab 104 Logfiles 43 43 M Math sub tab Description 100 Maximum ratings 197 Microsoft NET Framework 14 Microsoft Windows 13 MOD Tab 182 Modulation option Block diagram 183 Mouse functionality Description 98 N Numeric Tab 120 Numerical resolution Specifications 203 Nyquist sampling theorem 198 O Operating conditions 197 Ordering guide 53 Out PWA Tab 194 P Performance diagrams 209 209 Phase Lock Loop PLL Tutorial 72 Phase noise reference oscillator Specifications 201 Phase resolution Specifications 201 PID Block diagram 170 PID Tab 169 PLL Block diagram 179 PLL Tab 178 Plotter Tab 122 Power inlet Back panel 51 Power LED Front panel 49 PWA Block diagram 189 Description 187 Tutorial 80 R Ref Trigger Front panel 49 Specifications 201 Tutorial 65 Reference signal UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Specifications 201 S Sampling rate Specifications 198 Scope Tab 125 Self calibration 42 166 212 Signal Input Front panel 49 Signal Input LED Front panel 49 Signal Inputs Specifications 200 Signal Output Front panel 49 Specifications 200 Signal Output LED Front panel 49 Signalling pathways diagram 52 Software Installation Linux 16 Requirements Linux 16 Supported versions of Linux 16 Windows 13 Specification
114. ampling Examples for oversampling values 0 2 0 1 averager output is sent to the PC during Averaging Periods Boxcar integrations 2 2 2 4 averager outputs are sent to the PC during Averaging Periods Boxcar integrations 1 2 1 0 5 only every other Averaging Periods Boxcar integrations an averager output is sent to the PC Value Overflow flag grey red Overflow detected Sticky flag cleared by restarting the boxcar The boxcar output may not be reliable any more Sample Loss grey red Data lost during streaming to PC Sticky flag cleared by restarting the boxcar For the Math sub tab please see Table 4 7 in the section called Cursors and Math UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 193 4 20 Out PWA Tab 4 20 Out PWA Tab The Out PWA tab relates to the UHF BOX Boxcar option and is only available if this option is installed on the UHF Instrument see Information section in the Device tab 4 20 1 Features m Period waveform analyzer for boxcar output samples multi channel boxcar deconvolution boxcar m Support signals derived from asynchronous optical sampling 4 20 2 Description The Out PWA tab provides access to the period waveform analyzer that acts on boxcar output samples This feature is also called multi channel boxcar or deconvolution boxcar Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 54 cpp icon and sho
115. an external program and the resulting data directly processed The device can be concurrently accessed via one or more of the APIs and via the user interface This enables easy integration into larger laboratory setups See the LabOne programming manual for further information Using the APIs the programmer has access to the same functionality that is available in the LabOne User Interface Controlling the Instrument via the LabOne User Interface This section describes the LabOne User Interface startup If the LabOne Software is not yet installed on the PC please follow the instructions in Section 1 4 Software Installation Ifthe device is not yet connected by USB or Ethernet please find more information in Section 1 5 3 Device Connectivity The most straight forward method to control and obtain data from the instrument is to use the LabOne User Interface which can be found under the Windows Start Menu see Figure 1 8 Click and select Start Menu Programs gt Zurich Instruments gt LabOne User Interface UHF This will open the User Interface in a new tab in your default web browser and start the UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 21 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument LabOne Data Server UHF and LabOne Web Server UHF programs in the background A detailed description of the software structure is found inthe Section 1 5 2 LabOne Software Architecture di Zurich Instruments d LabOne AFI m LabOne Data gt t LabO
116. and packets from the device Processing integer value Number of buffers being processed for command packets Small values indicate proper performance For a TCP IP interface command packets are sent using the TCP protocol Packet Loss integer value Number of command packets lost since device start Command packets contain device settings that are sent to and received from the device Bandwidth numeric value Command streaming bandwidth usage on the physical network connection between device and data server Pending integer value Number of buffers ready for receiving data packets from the device Processing integer value Number of buffers being processed for data packets Small values indicate proper performance For a TCP IP interface data packets are sent using the UDP protocol Packet Loss integer value Number of data packets lost since device start Data packets contain measurement data Bandwidth numeric value Data streaming bandwidth usage on the physical network connection between device and data server FW Load numeric value Indicates the CPU load on the processor where the firmware is running UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 168 4 16 PID Tab 4 16 PID Tab The PID tab relates to the UHF PID Quad PID PLL Controller option and is only available if this option is installed on the UHF Instrument see Information section in the Device tab Note The PID option and its settings creates interd
117. annel alternates quickly between both logical states As soon as this is the case one can select Trigger 2 as a Signal Inout for demodulator 8 in order to reference oscillator 2 to oscillator 1 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 67 3 3 Tutorial Amplitude Modulation 3 3 Tutorial Amplitude Modulation 3 3 1 3 3 2 Note This tutorial is applicable to UHF Instruments having the UHF MF Multi frequency and the UHF MOD AM FM Modulation options installed Goals and Requirements This tutorial explains how to generate an amplitude modulated AM signal as well as how to demodulate an AM signal by reading out both the carrier and double sidebands amplitude and phase simultaneously The tutorial can be done using a simple loop back connection Preparation To perform this tutorial one simply needs to connect a BNC cable from Signal Output 1 to Signal Input 1 as shown in Figure 3 13 This will allow the user to perform the AM modulation and demodulation in this tutorial without needing an external source U H Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Aux Output 0000 Front Panel Figure 3 13 Internally generated AM signal measured on Signal Input 1 Note This tutorial is for all UHF units with lock in capability as well as having the UHF MF Multi frequency and UHF MOD AF FM Modulation options installed Connect the cables as described above Make sure th
118. ar browsers Chrome Internet Explorer Opera Firefox or Safari Note By creating a shortcut to Google Chrome on your desktop with the Target path to chrome exe app http 127 0 0 1 8006 setin Properties you run the LabOne User Interface in Chrome in application mode which improves the user experience by removing the unnecessary browser controls UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 22 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument Device And Settings Dialog After starting the LabOne user interface software a dialog is shown to select the device and settings for the session Device and Settings Version 15 01 28723 Server Connectivity 127 0 0 1 8004 Available Devices pied En Device Interface Status a F U rl C h OJ DEV2009 USB Connected p Instruments Saved Settings Auto Start f Name Date vy Comment yr last_session_Pll 2015 03 11 15 39 44 Comment test 2015 03 11 12 56 04 basic setup Jr Mod 2015 02 04 15 49 20 Num 2015 02 04 15 49 20 PII 2015 02 04 15 49 20 Scope 2015 02 04 15 49 20 Sweep 2015 02 04 15 49 20 PWA 2014 09 04 09 58 12 Figure 1 9 Dialog Device and Settings The term session is used for an active connection between the user interface and the device Such a session is defined by device specific and user interface settings Several sessions can be started in parallel The sessions run on a shared LabOne Web Server A detailed description of the software architecture can be found in Section 1 5 2 Software
119. asurement of modulated signals at various harmonic frequencies The objective of multi frequency is to increase the information that can be derived from a measurement which is particularly important for one time non repeating events and to increase the speed of a measurement since different frequencies do not have to be applied one after the other See Also Multi frequency Effective bandwidth considering the area below the transfer function of a low pass filter in the frequency spectrum NEPBW is used when the amount of power within a certain bandwidth is important such as noise measurements This unit corresponds to a perfect filter with infinite steepness at the equivalent frequency See Also Bandwidth For sampled analog signals the Nyquist frequency corresponds to two times the highest frequency component that is being correctly represented after the signal conversion Measure ofan instrument s ability to faithfully output a set voltage at a given frequency versus a traceable standard Over Volt signal input saturation and clipping of signal Personal Computer Phase Detector Electronic circuit that serves to track and control a defined frequency For this purpose a copy of the external signal is generated such that itis in phase with the original signal but with usually better spectral characteristics It can act as frequency stabilization frequency multiplication or as frequency recovery In both analog and digital implemen
120. ata packets maybe lost if total bandwidth exceeds the physical interface bandwidth available Data may also be lost if the host computer is not able to handle high bandwidth data Network card setting optimization and Jumbo frame enabling may increase the maximal effective bandwidth Note Packet loss on command streaming over TCP or USB command packets should never be lost as it creates an invalid state The Device monitor is collapsed by default and generally only needed for servicing It indicates vitality signals of some of the Instruments hardware components Note The calibration routine takes about 200 ms for that time the transfer of measurement data is stopped That will lead to the following visible effects on the UI missing data on the plotter m the Ul will shortly freeze the data loss flag will not report data loss as the server intentionally trashed data m Sweeper SW Trigger and Scope will behave as usual and wait until they get data again m he Spectrum tool will restart as it can only analyze continuously sampled data Please see also additional remarks regarding calibration in Section 5 6 4 15 3 Functional Elements Table 4 43 Device tab 4 digit number Device serial number UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 166 4 15 Device Tab Device type FPGA HDL firmware revision Digital Board Hardware revision of the FPGA base board Analog Board Hardware revision of the analog board Revis
121. ation only integrates the Superimposed sine and not the pulse waveform itself The subtraction will then be only on the sine component UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 87 3 6 Tutorial PWA and Boxcar Averager 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 55 1mV A66 9mV Amplitude mV _ 167 6deg A 10 0deg Phase deg Figure 3 35 Baseline subtraction setup Once the cursors are defined one simply clicks on Run Stop in the Baseline sub tab One will see right away in the Plotter window that the sine component disappears The trace that is left is again the original Boxcar averager value Presets Tree Settings Math Run Stop Recording w 0 158 E Boxcar 1 Amplitude Input Signal oO a 0 156E 0 000005 Selection Filter A 0 00000s View Filter All e i 0 154 dev2032 auxouts 0 gt 0 152 1 Man 2 Lin gt 0 150 j boxcars 0 148 0 2 ego E 0 146 E demods Io 0 144 0 00000000000000Vs i 1 my A 0 00000000000000Vs l 2 5 4 94 4 93 4 92 4 91 4 90 4 89 2 5 a ja Time s anre Lin LUE ch fueCoe fo Figure 3 36 Boxcar output with baseline subtraction UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 88 3 7 Tutorial Multi channel Boxcar Averager 3 7 Tutorial Multi channel Boxcar Averager 3 7 1 3 7 2 Note This tutorial is applicable to UHF Instruments having the UHF BOX Boxcar Averager option installed Goals and Requirements This tutorial explains ho
122. bled Demods Cartesian A 0 000s Enabled Demods Polar Ld PID Errors Vertical Axis Groups Signal Type Channel Demod X 1 Amplitude V o Demodulator 1 R _ Demodulator 2 R Drop signal here for new group Drop signal group here to remove Did D BE K 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 Time s Vertical Axis Groups Figure 4 4 Vertical Axis Group in Plotter tool Table 4 9 Vertical Axis Groups description Vertical Axis Group Manages signal groups sharing a common vertical axis Show or hide signals by changing the check box state Split a group by dropping signals to the field Drop signal here to add new group Remove signals by dragging them on a free area Rename group names by editing the group label Axis tick labels of the selected group are shown in the plot Cursor elements of the active wave selected are added in the cursor math tab Signal Type Demod X Y R Theta Select signal types for the Vertical Axis Group Frequency Aux Input 1 2 HW Trigger PID Error PID Shift PID Value Boxcar AU Cartesian AU Polar Channel integer value selects a channel to be added Add Signal Adds a signal to the plot The signal will be added to its default group It may be moved by drag and drop to its own group All signals within a group share a common y axis Select a group to bring its axis to the foreground and display its labels UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 103 4 2 Lock in Tab 4 2
123. cale button settings see also Section 4 1 3 The maximum duration data is kept in the memory can be defined as window length parameter in the Settings sub tab Note Setting the window length to large values when operating at high sampling rates can lead to memory problems on the PC used The sampling rate of the demodulator data is determined by the Rate value in Sa s set in the Lock in tab similarly the rates for PID and Boxcar related data are set in the associated tabs The plotter data can be continuously saved to disk by pressing the record button in the config tab which will be indicated by a green Recording REC LED in the status bar Functional Elements Table 4 18 Plotter ee Control sub tab ControVTool Tool a Description Ru CC R Run Stop Start and stop continuous data plotting roll mode elect a Preset Enabled Demods R Selects the amplitude of all enable demodulators Enabled Demods Selects X and Y of all enabled demodulators Cartesian Enabled Selects amplitude and phase of all enabled Demods Polar demodulators Boxcars Selects the amplitude of boxcar 1 and 2 PID Errors elects the error of all PID Arithmetic Units Selects the output of all Cartesian and polar arithmetic units elects the signals as defined in the tree sub tab For the Vertical Axis Groups please see Table 4 9 in the section called Vertical Axis Groups For the Tree sub tab please see Table 4 8 in the section call
124. can help to characterize l V curves Note Itis important to realize that the Sweeper actively modifies the main settings of the demodulators and oscillators So in particular for situations where multiple experiments are served maybe even from different control computers great care needs to be taken so that the parameters altered by the sweeper module do not have unwanted effects elsewhere For frequency sweeps the default sweep operation is logarithmic i e with the Log button activated In this mode the sweep parameter points are distributed logarithmically as opposed to equidistant for linear sweeps between the start and stop values This feature is particularly useful for sweeps over several decades which is common for frequency sweeps In order to cover the whole spectrum it is advantageous for these sweeps to rely on the auto bandwidth feature where the sweeper automatically changes the demodulator bandwidth during the sweep to accommodate for the local step size Regarding the details of signal acquisition and interpretation the sweeper offers generally two modes of operation the Application Mode and the Advanced Mode The Application Mode provides the choice between six measurement approaches that should help to obtain correct measurement results for certain applications quickly Users who like to be in full control of all the settings can access them by switching to the Advanced Mode That allows for instance to define the number of
125. carrier Off Sideband is disabled The sideband demodulator behaves like a normal demodulator Sideband right to the carrier Sideband left to the carrier Carrier oscillator index Select the oscillator for the carrier signal Sideband 1 oscillator index Select the oscillator for the first sideband Sideband 2 oscillator index Select the oscillator for the second sideband Harm T to 1023 Set harmonic of the carrier frequency 1 Fundamental Harm 1 to 1023 Set harmonic of the first sideband frequency 1 fundamental UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 184 4 18 MOD Tab Harm Ito 1023 Set harmonic of the second sideband frequency 1 fundamental Channel Signal Inputs Select Signal Input for the carrier demodulation Ref Trigger Auxiliary Inputs Auxiliary Outputs Channel Signal Inputs Select Signal Input for the sideband Ref Trigger demodulation Auxiliary Inputs Auxiliary Outputs Phase 1807 to 1807 Phase shift applied to the reference input of the carrier demodulator and also to the carrier signal on the Signal Outputs Phase 180 to 180 Phase shift applied to the reference input of the sideband demodulator and also to the sideband signal on the Signal Outputs Zero Z Adjust the carrier demodulator phase automatically in order to read zero degrees Shifts the phase of the reference at the input of the carrier demodulator in order to achieve zero phase at the demodulator output This action maxim
126. cording Config x Device X Aux X Lock in X Add Row x Web Server Sessions User Preferences Record Data Revision 28804 _ y Display Theme Light v Selection Filter Record Host 10 42 3 100 Current Session 15 Print Theme Light v View Filter All vy Format Matlab Port 8006 Sess Grid Dashed v E Device 2044 a Folder Data Server Settings Show Shortcuts Arithmetic Units Cartesian Revision 28804 File Name FunctionalPix_ Dynamic Tabs t AU Cartesian 1 Host 127 0 0 1 Include Device Log Format Matlab T ol AU CAnesian 2 Size 0 000 Bytes Port 8004 Include UI e CSV Delimiter Semicolon aar a Connectivity From Everywh Load Preferences 8J Auto Start O 7 Pn iae s e Se Seer eee eee Savo Auxiliary Inputs Aux In 1 zl Drop settings file s here Al GScdoseeosne cs sssebeceoseseseesns Figure 4 22 LabOne UI Config tab The Connection section provides information regarding TCP connection and server versions Access from remote locations can be restricted with the connectivity setting The Session section provides the session number which is also displayed in status bar Clicking on Session Dialog opens the session dialog window same as start up screen that allows to load different settings files as well as to connect to other instruments The Settings section allows to directly load and save instrument and UI settings that are later available in the session dialogue UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich
127. d to erase the integrator which is usually several 10 ms long During that time no signals can be acquired For periodic signals this means a limitation to frequencies of a few 10 kHz when signal loss cannot be afforded measurement time needs to be minimized while high SNR is crucial Note The Zurich Instruments Boxcar uses a synchronous detection approach instead of the traditional triggering method described above A reference frequency has to be provided either from external or an internal oscillator can be used instead of a trigger signal and the Boxcar window is defined in terms of the phases of that reference frequency Note Using asynchronous detection scheme in combination with a fixed input sampling rate of 1 8 GSa s excludes all commensurate signal frequencies from proper analysis The Ul provides warnings whenever the reference frequency is anywhere close to any of these Potential issues can be easily quantified by displaying the bin counts in the PWA sub tab Figure 4 32 shows a detailed block diagram how signal processing is performed UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 188 4 19 Boxcar Tab Boxcar Averager Oscillators y _ Phase Trigger a Harmonic Start Phase Stop Phase USB LAN E Baseline Start Phase Moving Osc Select Average Aux Out _ _ Signal Input Select Averaging Inputs Periods lt 450 MSa s OutPWA Figure 4 32 Boxcar block diagram The input s
128. ddress of the LabOne Web Server localhost 127 0 0 1 Port 4 digit integer LabOne Web Server TCP IP port Host default is P Address of the LabOne Data Server localhost 127 0 0 1 Host default is Type IP Address here to connect to LabOne Data localhost 127 0 0 1 Server running ona different PC Port default is 8004 TCP IP port used to connect to the LabOne Data Server Connectivity Localhost Only Forbid Allow to connect to this Data Server from From Everywhere other computers File Upload drop area Drag and drop files in this box to upload files Clicking on the box opens a file dialog for file upload Supported files Settings xml software update LabOneLinuxARM32 tar gz Uploading software updates will automatically trigger the update process if the file is valid and has a different revision than the currently installed software Current Session integer number Session identifier A session is a connection between a client and LabOne Data Server Also indicated in status bar UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 162 4 14 Config Tab session Dialog Session Dialog Open the session dialog window This allows for device or session change The current session can be continued by pressing cancel selection of Save load the device and user interface available file names settings to from the selected file File location user AppData Roaming Zurich Instruments LabOne WebServer setting Include
129. delines This chapter is delivered as hard copy with all initial instrument delivery to customers It is integral part of the UHF User Manual UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 7 1 1 Quick Start Guide 1 1 Quick Start Guide This page addresses all the people who impatiently are awaiting their new gem to arrive and want to see it up and running quickly Please proceed with the following steps 1 Check the package content Besides the Instrument there should be a country specific power cable an USB cable an Ethernet cable and a hard copy of the user manual Chapter 1 2 Check the Handling and Safety Instructions in Section 1 3 3 Download and install the latest LabOne software from the Zurich Instruments Download Center www zhinst com downloads Access credentials are usually provided by email along with the shipping information Choose the download file that fits your PC e g Windows with 64 bit addressing For more detailed information see Section 1 4 4 Connect the Instrument to the power line turn iton and then connect in with the measurement PC by using the USB cable The necessary drivers will now be installed automatically The front panel LED will blink orange at this stage For more detailed information see Section 1 5 2 5 Start the LabOne User Interface UHF from the Windows Start Menu The default Web Browser will open and show a start screen The front panel LED turns from blinking orange to a steady
130. demodulation and its higher harmonics The sinc is an additional filter that attenuates these unwanted components in the demodulator output Makes all demodulators filter settings equal order time constant bandwidth Pressing the lock copies the settings from demodulator one into the settings of all demodulators When the lock Is pressed any modification to a field is immediately changing all other settings Releasing the lock does not change any setting and permits to individually adjust the filter settings for each demodulator Enable Streaming ON demodulator Enables the streaming of demodulated samples active in real time to the host computer The streaming rate is defined is the field on the right hand side As aconsequence demodulated samples can be visualized on the plotter and a corresponding numeric entry in the numerical tool is activated Note increasing number of active demodulators increases load on physical connection to the host computer OFF demodulator Disables the streaming of demodulated samples inactive to the host computer Rate Sa s 0 42 Sa s to Defines the demodulator sampling rate the 2 3 MSa s number of samples that are sent to the host computer per second A rate of about 7 10 higher as compared to the filter bandwidth usually provides sufficient aliasing Suppression This is also the rate of data received by LabOne Data Server and saved to the computer hard disk This setting has no i
131. distinct X and Y values of all demodulators or alternatively the output samples of either Boxcar unit In addition scaling factors can be applied based on adjustable variables derived from the auxiliary inputs or even the other Cartesian unit The polar units can perform similar computations on demodulator magnitude Demod R and angle Demod In addition the polar units can also operate on the magnitude and angle of a complex value computed from the two Cartesian units as C1 iC2 R C1 iC2 or O C1 iC2 respectively Each polar unit must operate entirely on either magnitude or angle values Similarly to the Cartesian units the magnitude and angle values can be multiplied with an adjustable variable a value from one of the auxiliary inputs or even the result of the other Polar unit 4 10 3 Functional Elements Table 4 34 Arithmetic unit tab The arithmetic unit is in add mode two independent demodulator outputs can be added together Divide The arithmetic unit is in divide mode two independent demodulator outputs can be divided by each other Multiply The arithmetic unit is in multiply mode two independent demodulator outputs can be multiplied with each other ON The arithmetic unit is operative and results are streamed to the host computer OFF The arithmetic unit is operative but results are not streamed to the host computer 0 2 to 1 75 MSa s_ Defines the number of arithmetic unit result samples that are sent to the
132. dition the Scope method can be said to be not an ideal tool to analyze a narrow peak especially when the peak width would be below a nanosecond Note The vertical axis of the Scope needs to be in manual mode in Persistence mode Persistence cannot be used simultaneously with averaging Amplitude V 0 5353us A 1 6ns 0 5338us Time us Figure 3 30 Scope waveform with persistence UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 85 3 6 Tutorial PWA and Boxcar Averager By comparison the PWA tool is certainly a more precise and elegant way to analyze this type of narrow pulse waveform Boxcar Integration To use the boxcar averager one can simply click on the Boxcar sub tab The boxcar averager integrates a section of the signal and has the output has a unit of volt second Vs The integrated gate can be set either manually in the Start Phase deg and Width deg fields or by positioning to vertical cursors and then by pressing Copy From Cursor The integrated value is updated in the Value Vs field An example boxcar setting is shown below The integration width is chosen to be 10 degrees around the maximum peak 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 PWA Boxcar Baseline Math f 80 E nn Se ee T Enable Recording 3 H 116 5deg Signal Input i Input Signal Sigin 1 v a z 60 lL J Ose 1 9 700003 H l H 126 6deg Frequency Hz 36M c9 A 10 0deg 4 o Gating Auto i Start Phase deg 116 5 Lin
133. does not need to be a resonator As shown in the screen shot below we are measuring an amplitude of about 2 4 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 76 3 5 Tutorial Automatic Gain Control mV at the peak of the resonance The goal is to control this amplitude to be a programmable value given by the user on the fly 2 149 2 150 2 151 2152 2 15 2377MV0 ES A 2 377mV Amplitude R mV 2150 5779kHz A 2150 5779kHz 0 000000V 2 149 2 150 2 151 2 152 2 15 Frequency Hz x10 Figure 3 21 resonance amplitude to be controlled For using the PID for AGC we need to pull up a PID tab For this tutorial let us use PID 3 And then we need to set up the input and output of the PID 3 controller The settings are shown in the table below Note Please note that PLL 1 and PLL 2 are in fact the same as PID 1 and PID 2 respectively Table 3 17 Settings acquire the reference signal po fse a Genter b The most difficult part of PID controller setting is to select the proper P and D gain values In this tutorial we will use the Good Gain method developed by Finn Haugen of Telemark University College in Norway in 2010 for PID controller tuning This is in essence a procedure to select PID parameters through real time observation of the closed loop step response Note The Good Gain method can be considered to be a closed loop tuning method Other types of closed loop PID tuning methods include the Ziegler
134. e Ethernet connection can be a point to point connection or an integration of the device into the global network LAN Depending on the network configuration and the installed network card one or the other connectivity is better suited This section gives a brief introduction to different methods Ifa device is connected to a network multiple PCs can access the same device However there is no shared device access possible at the same time To control the access to a device two different connectivity states are needed visible and connected UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 29 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument Device 1 connected TCPIP Network yee a Li F Device 3 USB free Sue TCPIP TCPIP Device 4 Device 2 In use TCPIP USB connected We A 6 6 6 6 66 6666 a 6 6 6 6 66 6666 a TCPIP TCPIP USB ai a F PC3 USB Device 5 aye _ USB visible ae USB connected TCPIP visible TCPIP connected Figure 1 16 Connectivity Figure 1 16 shows some examples of possible configurations of PC to device connectivity m Server on PC 1 is connected to device 1 USB and device 2 USB m Server on PC 2 is connected to device 4 TCPIP m Server on PC 3 is connected to device 5 m he device 3 is free and visible to PC 1 and PC 2 over TCPIP m Both device 2 and device 4 are accessible by TCPIP and USB interface Only one interface is logically connected to the server It is important
135. e Installation 1 Install the PCle card in the PC The card must be inserted into a x8 or x16 PCle slot 2 If the option is bought after delivery of the instrument Turn the UHF device off and disconnect it from the power source Unscrew the 10GbE cover Carefully insert the module with the heat sink facing up Make sure that the module is snapped in Aclick should be noticeable 3 Remove the protectors from both ends of the fiber cable 4 Carefully connect the cable The physical link can be checked after programming the UHF 10G feature code as described in the next section Software Setup The optical 10GbE interface is a point to point network Therefore the network card should be setup as explained in the section called Multicast Point to Point P2P The default 10GbE address is 192 168 2 10 Hence the following static IP of the PC should be selected 192 168 2 n where n 2 9 The network mask should be 255 255 255 0 Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically IP address 19 168 Subnet mask 255 255 255 Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server El Validate settings
136. e Opening ONS OF Show gate opening on the PWA plot Averaging Periods 1 LO 2 26 Number of periods to average The output will be refreshed up to 512 times during the specified number of periods This setting has no effect on Output PWAs Averaging BW 10 Hz to 7 MHz The 3 dB signal bandwidth of the Boxcar Averager is determined by the oscillation frequency and the Number of Averaging Periods set Note internally the boxcar signal is sampled at arate of 14 MSa s and the signal bandwidth of the auxiliary output is 7 MHz Rate Limit Sa s 1to 14 06 MSa s Rate Limit for Boxcar output data sent to PC This value does not affect the Aux Output for which the effective rate is given by min 14 MSa s Frequency max 1 Averaging Periods 51 2 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 192 4 19 Boxcar Tab Rate Sa s 1to 14 06 MSa s Display of the currently effective rate used for data transfer to the PC given by min 14 MSa s Frequency max 1 Averaging Periods 512 This value is read only Rate Limit Sa s o Rate Limit ee Display of the Rate Limit which defines the Rate Sa s rr ee transfer rate Rate Sa s Display of the currently active transfer rate Oversampling Integer value Indicates in powers of 2 the number of averager ideally O outputs sent to the PC while Averaging Periods Boxcar integrations are obtained Positive integer values indicate oversampling Negative integer values indicate unders
137. e UHFLI is powered on and then connect the UHFLI through the USB to your PC or to your local area network LAN where the host computer resides After starting LabOne the default web browser opens with the LabOne graphical user interface The tutorial can be started with the default instrument configuration e g after a power cycle and the default user interface settings e g as is after pressing F5 in the browser 3 3 3 Generate the Test Signal UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 68 3 3 Tutorial Amplitude Modulation In this section you will learn how to generate an AM signal with a 10 0 MHz 1 0V sinusoidal carrier modulated by a second 100 kHz 500 mV sinusoid The Lock in tab and the MOD tab settings are shown in the following table Table 3 13 Settings generate the AM signal Lon To quickly verify that the AM signal is generated correctly we can check the spectrum of the AM signal on Signal Input 1 using the Scope tool with the following settings The Scope basically displays the FFT spectrum of Signal Input 1 With a sampling rate of 28 MHz it satisfies sufficiently the Nyquist rate to see the 10 MHz carrier The 64 000 points samples correspond to about 2 3 ms of the sampled duration This should be enough to capture the frequency spectrum at kHz resolution Note The maximum sample window displayed in the Scope is 64000 points Table 3 14 Settings acquire the reference signal Scope Hovizontat
138. e User Interface UHF pa ziContral di Documentation di LabOne Servers gt lt Firmware Upgrade UHF S4 LabCne Data Server UHF gt lt LabOne Web Server UHF J Logs I settings Mm 4 Back Search programs and files Figure 1 23 Starting the Firmware Upgrade Utility via the Windows Start Menu To start the Firmware Upgrade Utility ClickandselectStart Menu gt All Programs gt Zurich Instruments gt LabOne Servers gt Firmware Upgrade UHF UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 39 1 6 Upgrading the Lock In Amplifier Firmware Note It s not necessary to have administrator rights in order to start or use the UHF Firmware Upgrade Utility Important Do not disconnect the USB cable to the UHF or power cycle the UHF whilst performing any of the following steps Upon starting the Firmware Upgrade Utility it should detect the device that is connected to the PC via USB The device ID is displayed next to Device S UHF Firmware Upgrade Utility oo I a A Versions available a wW P FPGA rew 2095 USB rew 1 30 s Pd wW i Firmware rew 22913 Powerrev 130619 Refresh Zurich Instruments Program Ext Overall progress Current task Action log Figure 1 24 The UHF Firmware Upgrade Utility upon start up Select the device you would like to upgrade select which device you would like to upgrade via the pull down menu If no device Is listed please try the following steps
139. e using the DEMODULATOR 8 row to generate the sweep signal as well as demodulating the resonator output The Lock in settings ensure especially that the oscillator used both for the sweep signal and the demodulation is the same i e the oscillator 2 In addition the input must be set to Signal Input 2 as shown in the connection diagram Once the Sweeper Run Stop button is pressed the sweeper will continuously and repeatedly sweep the frequency response of the quartz oscillator The user can then use the zoom tools to get a higher resolution on the interested resonance peak since one may have several resonance peaks in the frequency spectrum The history length of 2 allows the user to keep on the screen one previous sweep while adjusting the zoom To redefine the start and stop frequencies for a finer sweeper range one needs to deactivate first the Dual Plot mode and then pres the Copy Range button This will automatically entering the zoomed sweep window range into the Start and Stop of the swept frequency range Remember to turn off Run Stop button under the Sweeper tab when done Note The sweep frequency resolution will get finer when zooming in horizontally using the Copy Range button even without changing the number of points When a resonance peak has been found you should get a spectrum similar to two screen shots below In this example we have selected the resonance peak at about 2 151 MHz The phase response of the resonator started at
140. easurement The drawback is that one cannot observe the external reference signal on the Scope tool when an REF Trigger inputs are used Ref Trigger Inputs are comparator based digital channels where the input impedance can be set to either 500 or 1 kQ in the Ref Trigger section in the DIO tab Moreover a suitable Trigger threshold can be defined by adjusting the Input Level definitions Note It is important to know that the trigger to discriminate the two logical states operates on the positive edge with a hysteresis of about 100 mV Consequently a peak to peak signal amplitude Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 65 3 2 Tutorial External Reference of minimum 200 mV should be provided as a external reference signal to guarantee reliable switching Note For signal frequencies larger than 10 MHz the 50Q input termination is strongly recommended to avoid signal reflections in the cable that can lead to false switching events The following DIO settings are used for this example Table 3 11 Settings acquire the reference signal DO Ref Trigger Input Level 290 mV When the signal is applied with a proper discrimination threshold chosen both control LEDs will turn on to indicate that the channel alternates quickly between high low logical states Once this is happening one can then select Trigger 1 as a Signal Input for demodulator 4 in order to reference oscillator 1 Scope x Num x Plotter x DIO x Digital I O Ref Trig
141. ed Tree Sub Tab Table 4 19 Plotter tab Settings sub tab Window Length 1OSto 170 Plotter memory depth Values larger than 10s may cause excessive memory consumption for UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 123 4 5 Plotter Tab signals with high sampling rates Auto scale or pan causes a refresh of the display for which only data within the defined window length are considered ON OFF Shows the histogram in the display 27 0 kHz to 28 1 MHz Streaming Rate of the scope channels The streaming rate can be adjusted independent from the scope sampling rate The maximum rate depends on the interface used for transfer Enable INZ OFF Enable scope streaming for the specified channel This allows for continuous recording of scope data on the plotter and streaming to disk For the Math sub tab please see Table 4 7 in the section called Cursors and Math UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 124 4 6 Scope Tab 4 6 Scope Tab 4 6 1 4 6 2 The Scope is a powerful time domain and frequency domain measurement tool as introduced in Section 4 1 2 and is available in all UHF Instruments The Scope records data from a single channel at up to 1 8 GSa s The channel can be selected among the two Signal Inputs Auxiliary Inputs Trigger Inputs and Demodulator Oscillator Phase The Scope records data sets of up to 64 000 samples in the standard configuration which corresponds to an acquisition
142. ed signal Mapping Enable linear scaling E Enable logarithmic scaling dB Enable logarithmic scaling in dB Manual Full Scale Scaling of the selected plot s Zoom To Limits Adjust the zoom to the current limits of the displayed histogram data Start Valu numeric valu Start value of the selected plot s Only visible for manual scaling Stop Valu numeric valu Stop value of the selected plot s Only visible for manual scaling UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 121 4 5 Plotter Tab 4 5 Plotter Tab 4 9 1 4 9 2 The Plotter is one of the powerful time domain measurement tools as introduced in Section 4 1 2 and is available in all UHF Instruments Features m Plotting of all streamed data e g demodulator data auxiliary inputs auxiliary outputs Boxcar data etc m Plotting of Scope data e g Signal Inputs requires UHF DIG option m Vertical axis grouping for flexible axis scaling m Polar and Cartesian data format for demodulator data m Histogram and Math functionality for data analysis 4 cursors for data analysis Support for Input Scaling and Input Units Description The Plotter serves as graphical display for time domain data in a roll mode i e continuous without triggering Whenever closed or anew instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 17 Pe icon and short SE eUPUEn Plotter Displays various continuously streamed
143. eee Harmonic Phase Shift T Signal gt Output a USB LAN Aux Out PID Signal Input Select Inputs Aux Out PID Figure 4 6 Demodulator block diagram 4 2 3 Functional Elements Table 4 11 Lock in tab Range 10 mV to 1 5 V Defines the gain of the analog input amplifier The range should exceed the incoming signal by roughly a factor two including a potential DC offset Note 1 the value inserted by the user may be approximated to the nearest value supported by the Instrument Note 2 a proper choice of range setting is crucial in order to achieve good accuracy and best possible signal to noise ratio UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 106 4 2 Lock in Tab as it targets to use the full dynamic range of the input ADC Auto be Automatic adjustment of the Range to about two times the maximum signal input amplitude measured over about 100 ms scaling inactive scaling of the input signal with an arbitrary factor throughout the graphical user interface This field can be used for unit conversions e g from mV to V Measurement Unit unit acronym Defines the measurement unit of the input The value in this field modifies the readout of all measurement tools in the user interface Typical uses of this field is to make measurements in the unit before the sensor transducer e g to take an transimpedance amplifier into account and to directly read results in Ampere ins
144. eir functionality It is important to know that the Signals and Operations defined will always be performed only on the currently chosen active trace Table 4 7 Plot math description source Select Cursor coordinates as input data Cursor Area Consider all plot data inside the rectangle defined by the cursor coordinates as input for statistical functions Min Max Avg Std Int Tracking Output plot value at current cursor position Options are X1 and X2 Wave Consider all plot data currently displayed in the Plot as input for statistical functions Min Max Avg Std Int Peak Find and determine the various peaks in the plotted data and their associated values elect Histogram related data as Math input Operation Select X1 X2 X2 X1 Cursors values and their differences Vl Wee AY Min Max Statistical Functions applied to a set of sample Avg Std Int Pos Level Finds the Position x values and the Levels y values of Peaks on a set of samples Add the selected math function to the result table below Add All Add All All Add all operations for the selected signal to the result table below Selectal E elect all lines from the result table above Clear Selected Clear selected lines from the result table above Unit Prefix Unt Erei Adds a suitable prefix to the SI units to allow for Ma better readability and increase of significant digits displayed UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 100
145. elected reference input Connects the selected oscillator with the demodulator corresponding to this line Number The demodulator is used in PLL mode for frequency tracking of the signal Note this function requires the UHF PID option to be installed and active on your instrument The demodulator is used by the UHF MOD option e g for the direct demodulation of carrier and sideband signals Osc oscillator index of available oscillators depends on the installed options Harm TtOTOZS Multiplies the demodulator s reference frequency with the integer factor defined by this field Demod Freq Hz O to 600 MHz Indicates the frequency used for demodulation and for output generation The frequency is calculated with oscillator frequency times the harmonic factor When the MOD option is used linear combinations of oscillator frequencies including the harmonic factors define the demodulation frequencies UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments TIa 4 3 Lock in MF Tab Phase deg 180 to 180 Phase shift applied to the reference input of the demodulator and also to signal on the Signal Outputs Zero Z Adjust the demodulator phase automatically in order to read zero degrees Shifts the phase of the reference at the input of the demodulator in order to achieve zero phase at the demodulator output This action maximizes the X output zeros the Y output zeros the O output and leaves the R output unchanged Signal Sig
146. ements All functional elements are equivalent to the ones on the lock in tab See Section 4 2 2 or Section 4 2 2 for UHF MF for a detailed description of the functional elements UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 157 4 13 DIO Tab 4 13 DIO Tab The DIO tab is mainly a settings tabs and is available in all UHF Instruments 4 13 1 Features m Monitor and control of digital I O connectors Control settings for external reference and triggering 4 13 2 Description The DIO tab is the main panel to control the digital inputs and outputs as well as the trigger levels and external reference channels Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 38 App icon and short description Gives access to all controls relevant for the digital inputs and outputs including the Ref Trigger connectors The DIO tab as displayed in Figure 4 21 is divided into two section a Digital I O section and the Ref Trigger section Config x Device Xx Aux xX Lock in x In Out x DIO x AddRow x Digital 1 0 Ref Trigger Input Output Bits Input Output Drive Input Level 500 Signal Width s Drive 31 24 0x00 0x00 1100 im V O z Off v 23 16 0x00 0x00 2 100 i1m V O z off v 15 8 0x00 0x00 3 99 9 V K Off v Feds 0x00 0x00 4 99 9m V g lt off v Format Hex Clock Internal 56 MHz Figure 4 21 LabOne UI DIO tab The Digital I O section provides num
147. ency period equals 360 degrees Width s 555 ps to period Boxcar averaging gate opening width in seconds It can be converted to phase se ieee 360 equals to a full period of the driving oscillator Width pts Integer valu Boxcar averaging gate opening width in sample at 1 8 GHz rate Too large gate width grey red Boxcar averaging gate opening width is more than one cycle of the signal and should be reduced Copy from cursor Copy from cursor Take cursor value to define Baseline Start value Start Mode Start deg Native definition of the boxcar baseline suppression gate start as phase Start s Definition of the boxcar baseline suppression gate start as time Offset deg Definition of the boxcar baseline Suppression gate start relative to the gate opening start as phase Offset s Definition of the boxcar baseline suppression gate start relative to the gate opening start as time Start deg 0 to 360 Boxcar baseline suppression gate opening start in degrees based on one oscillator frequency period equals 360 degrees Start s O to period Boxcar baseline suppression gate opening start in seconds based on one oscillator frequency period equals 360 degrees Start deg Oto 360 Boxcar baseline suppression gate opening start in degrees relative to the gate opening start Start s O to period Boxcar baseline suppression gate opening start in seconds relative to the gate opening start ON OFF Enable Baseline Suppression Show Gat
148. ent There are a couple of ways to measure a low duty cycle signal with the UHF The obvious method is to use the digital scope function inside the LabOne interface to observe the sampled signal in the time domain The other method is to utilise the PWA and the boxcar averager Both methods will be shown The first task is to generate a test signal Narrow Pulse Signal Generation Using the external arbitrary waveform generator generate a pulse with the following specifications Table 3 18 Narrow pulse signal specifications Pulse Specification Amplitude 100 mVpp Note For this exercise an Agilent 33500B Truefrom waveform generator is used The minimum duty cycle for a 9 7 MHz signal is limited to about 16 The LabOne Scope can be used to observe the generated pulse waveform Connect the output of the AWG directly to Signal Input 1 of the UHF The Scope settings in LabOne are given in the table below Also the AWG should also be able to provide a TTL synchronization signal to be connected to the UHF REF Trigger input This trigger signal will be used later on in for the PWA Table 3 19 E observe the a waveform Display Vertical A Channel 1 Signal Input 1 0n Scope Trigger Signel____ Signalinput 1 00 Scope Trigger fene n Scope Trigger frveteress fom Scope Trigger vs n One should now be able to observe Signal Input 1 similar to the following waveform in the Scope window The Scope is set to self trigger on
149. ent click on the Advise button The results will be shown in the read only fields just below Moreover a graphical representation of the determined transfer function in indicated by the plot on the right If the resulting values are within the range of expectations one can then copy the values to the Instrument by pressing the To PLL button Before enabling the PLL one can quickly open the Lock in tab to check if the right Signal Input is associated with the chosen demodulator Also the values for the frequency limits given in Hz should exceed the target bandwidth at least by about 5 to 10 times A successful lock is indicated by the green LED next to the Error PLL Lock field which should indicate very low values now One can now play with the bandwidth in the PLL Advisor and calculate a new set of parameters and copy it to the Instrument in order to improve performance Displaying the associated demodulator phase in the Plotter along with a Histogram and Math function e g standard deviation can help to characterize residual phase deviations and further improve lock performance by manual tweaking UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 179 4 17 PLL Tab 4 17 3 Functional Elements Table 4 48 PLL tab ON OFF Enable the PLL i e the associated PID controller Center Freq Hz O to 600 MHz Center frequency of the PLL oscillator The PLL frequency shift is relative to this center frequency Auto Adjust x Adjust the center
150. ependencies with settings that are controlled from other panels If the PID output controls a certain variable e g Signal Output Offset this variable will be shown as read only in its natural position i e the Signal Output section on the Lock in tab for this case Note As well as the PID controls other Instrument resources each of the PIDs can also be used from other Instrument entities In particular when the user selects ExtRef for either Demodulator 4 or 8 see Lock in tab Demodulator section Mode column one PID will be blocked Similarly using the PLLs will cause one PID controller to be blocked for each enabled PLL and can then only be controller from the PLL tab however all the values are still updated in the PID tab as read only values 4 16 1 Features m Four independent proportional integral derivative PID controllers m PID Advisor with multiple DUT models transfer function and step function modeling to achieve a adjustable target bandwidth Auto tune PID that automatically minimizes the average PID error signal by adjusting various set of parameters and bandwidth m High speed operation with up to 800 kHz loop filter bandwidth m Input parameters demodulator data auxiliary inputs auxiliary outputs and arithmetic unit Output parameters Output Amplitudes Oscillator frequencies Demodulator Phase Auxiliary Outputs and Signal Output Offsets m Phase unwrap for demodulator O data 64 n e g for optical pha
151. equency Config x Aux x Lock in x AddRow x lt 5 Signal Inputs Oscillators Demodulators Signal Outputs Reference Frequencies E Input Low Pass Filters Data Transfer E Osice Input 1 100 Mode Frequency Hz Mode Osc HarmDemod Freq Hz Phase deg Signal Order BW 34B sic ER En Rate Sas EE Trigger Trig Mode Output 1 rls Range 1 2 H si 1 ExtRef 30 0040001M 1 Demod 7 1 30 0040001M 0 0000 E Sigint gt 3 100 1 717k Continous v On eT Scaling 1 viv oO 2 Manual 30 0040000M 2 Demod 30 0040001M 0 0000 FZ Sigint j 100 1 717k Continous Range v JA ose AC gwg si 3 Demod 100 1 717k Continous Offset 0 000 v mas A 4 ExtRef 299 1 717k Continous Amp V 1 000 v 1 17 1 17 1 30 0040001M 0 0000 amp Sigint 1 1 30 0040000M 0 0000 E Triggeri e w w 4 Input 2 100 Range 1 5 A 60 5 Demod 2 1 30 0040000M 0 0000 E Sigin2 Scaling 1 viv 6 Demod 2 1 30 0040000M 0 0000 FZ Sigin2 2 1 2 1 Output 2 1 717k Continous On 1 717k Continous Range v JA 100 i 100 100 100 ac Ej son g eal 7 Demod 30 0040000M 0 0000 E Sigin2 iag 30 0040000M 0 0000 Sigin2 1 717k Continous Offset 500 0m Vv Amp V 500 0m v w v 8 v 4 e 4 4 8 Demod 1 717k Continous Scope x Num x Plotter x Add Row x op Gd a SARL ES i Ji Sih LL ST Ri J Te ML aa a 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Presets Tree Settings Recording
152. er Application Mode The sweeper sets the filters and other parameters automatically Advanced Mode The sweeper uses manually configured parameters Application Parameter Sweep Only one data sample is acquired per sweeper point Parameter Multiple data samples are acquired per sweeper Sweep Averaged point of which the average value is displayed Noise Amplitude Multiple data samples are acquired per sweeper Sweep point of which the standard deviation is displayed e g to determine input noise Freq Response Narrow band frequency response analysis Analyzer Averaging is enabled L 3 Omega Sweep Optimized parameters for 3 omega application Averaging is enabled FRA Sinc Filter The sinc filter helps to speed up measurements for frequencies below 50 HZ in FRA mode For higher frequencies it is automatically disabled Averaging is off Precision Low gt fast sweep Medium accuracy precision is optimized for sweep speed High gt slow sweep High accuracy precision takes more measurement time Bandwidth Mode Auto All bandwidth settings of the chosen demodulators are automatically adjusted For logarithmic sweeps the measurement bandwidth is adjusted throughout the measurement Fixed Define a certain bandwidth which is taken for all chosen demodulators for the course of the measurement Manual The sweeper module leaves the demodulator bandwidth settings entirely untouched TC Defines the low pass filter charact
153. er during the LabOne software installation process 2 Start the LabOne32 64 XX XX XXXXX msi LabOne installer program by a double click and follow the instructions Please note that Windows Administrator rights are required for installation The installation proceeds as follows m On the welcome screen click the Next button UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 14 1 4 Software Installation UHF User Manual je Zurich Instruments LabOnexx xx xxx Setup AALSA AS Welcome to the Zurich Instruments nag nn LabOne XX XX XXXXX Setup Wizard Zurich The Setup Wizard will install Zurich Instruments LabOne XxXxX 000x on your computer Click Next to continue or Instruments Cancel to exit the Setup Wizard Zurich Instruments AG Technooarkstrasse 1 8005 Zurich info zhinst com Figure 1 2 Installation welcome screen After reading through the Zurich Instruments license agreement check the accept the terms in the License Agreement check box and click the Next button Review the features you want to have installed For UHF devices the UHF Series Device feature theWeb Server feature and the API feature Is required If HF2 devices are used on the same PC itis important to keep the HF2 Series Device feature enabled as well If you like to install shortcuts on your desktop area enable the feature Desktop Shortcuts To proceed click the Next button ie Zurich Instruments LabO
154. er is an application dedicated to serving up the web pages that constitute the LabOne user interface The LabOne Web Server supports multiple clients simultaneously That UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 20 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument is to say that more than one session can be used to view data and manipulate the instrument A session could be running inatab ina browser on the PC on which the LabOne software is installed It could equally well be running in a tab of a browser on a remote machine The user interface is touch enabled Therefore it is possible to use the LabOne User Interface on a mobile device like a tablet The measurement data of the instrument can be viewed remotely from any device that has a browser and has access to the Web Server via the LAN To connect the instrument the user simply has to type the IP address or domain name of the computer running the LabOne web server together with the port number 8006 Examples are m 127 0 0 1 8006 m localhost 8006 m myPC company com 8006 The most recent versions of the most popular browsers are supported Chrome Firefox Internet Explorer Safari and Opera LabOne API Layer The lock in amplifier can also be controlled via one or more of the Zurich Instruments provided APIs APIs are currently provided in the form of DLLs for the following programming environments MATLAB m Python m LabVIEW C The instrument can therefore be controlled by
155. er of displayed harmonics Signal Waveform Select signal to be displayed For the Math sub tab please see Table 4 7 in the section called Cursors and Math UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 195 Chapter 5 Specifications Important Unless otherwise stated all specifications apply after 30 minutes of instrument warm up Important 10 minutes after power up of the Instrument an internal calibration is performed This internal calibration is essential to achieve the specifications of the system Further it is required to perform the internal calibration after 7 days of instrument use This auto calibration is turned on per default and can be configured in the Device tab Important Changes in the specification parameters are explicitly mentioned in the revision history of this document UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 196 5 1 General Specifications 5 1 General Specifications Table 5 1 General and storage Parameter min typ max storage temperature ac c storage relative humidity non condensing 95 operating temperature OSG MME operating relative humidity non condensing 90 Specificanontemeerawre Tee ae powerconsmpion O o SYS e power inlet support 100 240 V 50 60 Hz multi mains operation power inlet fuses 250 V 2A fast acting 9 x 20 mm environmental policy RoHS compliant dimensions with handles and feet Ab OX34 5 gt IOO
156. er pressing F5 in the browser 3 7 3 Amplitude Modulated Narrow Pulse Measurement AM Modulated Narrow Pulse Test Signal Generation Using the external arbitrary waveform generator a pulse waveform with the following specification should be generated UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 89 3 7 Tutorial Multi channel Boxcar Averager Table 3 23 Narrow pulse signal specifications Pulse Specification Amplitude 100 mVpp Note An Agilent 33500B Truefrom waveform generator is used in this example The minimum duty cycle fora 10 MHz signal is limited to about 16 An external AM modulation scheme is activated with 100 AM depth Furthermore a sine wave should be generated from the UHF to amplitude modulate the AWG output The output settings of the UHF are given below Table 3 24 Settings observe the pulse waveform Seope Tigger fenatio Jon Now one should be able to see a waveform in Scope that is similar to the one shown below Amplitude mV Figure 3 38 AM modulated pulse waveform Envelope Recovery with the Output PWA UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 90 3 7 Tutorial Multi channel Boxcar Averager Just like the previous tutorialin the section called Low Duty Cycle Analysis with Period Waveform Analyzer the PWA can be used to observe the pulse train Although the measured result is similar to the previous tutorial one can see in the PWA screen shot below that the a
157. erage filter with configurable filter depth The averaging filter can help suppress noise components that are uncorrelated with the main signal It is particularly useful when the spectrum of the signal is considered as it can help to reveal harmonic signals and disturbances that might otherwise be hidden below the noise floor The frequency domain representation is activated in the Control sub tab by selecting Freq Domain FFT as the Horizontal Mode It allows the user to observe the spectrum of the acquired shots of samples All controls and settings are shared between the time domain and frequency domain representations making it a comprehensive tool for data analysis UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments T27 4 6 Scope Tab Scope x Numeric xX Plotter x Add Row x 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 Control Trigger Advanced Math Scope Chi Wav Scope Ch2 Wave Horizontal Mode Freq Domain FFT v Wave V P X2 0 Hz 2 A 0Hz Sampling Rate 1 80GHz Length pts 4000 Vertical Channel 1 Signal Input 1 Ag Min 300 0r Max 300 0n gt Channel 2 Signal Input 2 ts O gt FS Min 1 0 Max 1 0 Avg Filter None gt og Averages 1 R Vertical Axis Groups Signal Type Channel Scope vii Wave V _ Scope Chi Wave Scope Ch2 Wave 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 g Drop signal here for new group Frequency MHz Drop signal group here to remove Figure 4 12 LabOne UI Scope tab Fre
158. eration records scope shots into the device memory This allows for recording of up to 1 8 GSa s until the memory is full After each scope shot there will be a dead time also known as holdoff time to re arm the trigger address the next memory block and transfer the data to the UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 129 4 6 Scope Tab PC Due to this dead time scope shots cannot be recorded back to back In order to record very long scope shots digitizer mode the Scope data can be streamed directly to the client bypassing the device memory This allows for continuous recording of very long Scope traces that exceed the available memory depth of the instrument The streamed Scope data will be shown in the Plotter tab together with all other streaming data Due to the limited transfer bandwidth over the TCPIP or USB interface the maximal sampling rate is restricted The sampling rate for the Scope streaming channels and the enabling of each channel is controlled in the Settings sub tab of the Plotter As the sampling rate of the Scope streaming can be adjusted independently from the Scope shot sampling rate it is possible to record continuous data together with triggered high sampling rate Scope shots The Scope streaming in the Plotter can be very useful for monitoring of the inputs Scope state output on Trigger Output The UHF DIG option extends the list of available Trigger Outputs by the six elements Scope Trigger Scope Armed Sco
159. erical monitors to observe the states of the digital inputs and outputs Moreover with the values set in the Output column and the Drive button activated the states can also be actively set in different numerical formats The Ref Trigger section for the 6 reference and trigger inputs and outputs The two BNC connectors on the front panel are numbered 1 and 2 and can act as inputs as well as outputs The first two lines in this section are associated to these front panel connectors On the back panel of the Instrument are 2 more trigger inputs line 3 and 4 left columns and 2 more trigger outputs line 3 and 4 right columns All four are SMA connectors UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 158 4 13 DIO Tab Note The Input Level determines the trigger threshold for trigger state discrimination Also a 100 mV hysteresis is applied that cannot be adjusted such that a minimum amplitude of more than 100 mV is needed for the Ref Trigger inputs to work reliably 4 13 3 Functional Elements Table 4 39 Digital input and output channels reference and trigger DIO bits label Partitioning of the 32 bits of the DIO into 4 buses of 8 bits each Each bus can be used as an input or output DIO input numeric value Current digital values at the DIO input port in either Hex or Binary format DIO output numeric valuein Digital output values Enable drive to apply the either hexadecimal signals to the output or binary format DIO dri
160. eristic using Time Constant Bandwidth Select time constant of the filter Bandwidth NEP Defines the low pass filter characteristic using the noise equivalent power bandwidth of the filter Bandwidth 3qB Defines the low pass filter characteristic using the cut off frequency of the filter Time Constant numeric value Defines the measurement bandwidth for Fixed Bandwidth bandwidth sweep mode and corresponds to either noise equivalent power bandwidth NEP time constant TC or 3 dB bandwidth 3 dB depending on selection Order numeric value Selects the filter roll off to use for the sweep in fixed bandwidth mode Range between 6 dB oct and 48 dB oct UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 148 4 9 Sweeper Tab Max Bandwidth Hz numeric value Maximal bandwidth used in auto bandwidth mode The effective bandwidth will be calculated based on this max value the frequency step size and the omega Suppression The NEP is correctly taken into account for demodulation bandwidths of up to 1 25 MHz Omega Suppression numeric value Suppression of the omega and 2 omega dB components Large suppression will have a significant impact on sweep time especially for low filter orders Min Settling Time s numeric value Minimum wait time in seconds between a sweep parameter change and the recording of the next sweep point This parameter can be used to define the required settling time of the experimental
161. ew Settings are greyed out and therefore 3 demodulators remain for simultaneous measurements The Signal column always defines the signal that is taken as input for the demodulator A wide choice of signals can be selected among the Signal Inputs the Trigger Inputs the Auxiliary Inputs and Auxiliary Outputs Like this it is possible to flexibly generate advanced measurement topologies adapting to many needs of the users For each demodulator an additional phase shift can be introduced to the associated oscillator by entering the phase offset in the Phase column This phase is added both to the reference channel and the output of the demodulator Hence when the frequency Is generated and detected using the same demodulator signal phase and reference phase change by the same amount and no change will be visible in the demodulation result Demodulation of frequencies that are integer multiples of any of the oscillator frequencies is achieved by entering the desired factor in the Harm column The demodulator readout can be obtained using the Numeric tab which is described in section 4 4 In the middle of the Lock in tab is the Low Pass Filters section where the filter order can be selected in the drop down list for each demodulator and the filter bandwidth BW 3dB can chosen by typing anumerical value Alternatively the time constant of the filter TC or the noise equivalent power filter bandwidth BW NEP can be chosen by clicking on the column s
162. fier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Aux Output 00 0860 Front Panel Resonator Figure 3 16 PLL connection with UHF The tutorial can be started with the default instrument configuration e g after a power cycle and the default user interface settings e g as is after pressing F5 in the browser Determine the Resonance of the Resonator In this section you will learn first how to find the resonance of your resonator by using the frequency sweeper tool under the Sweeper tab To get started one could in theory define a frequency sweep range from DC to 600 MHz and slowly narrow down the range using multiple sweeps in order to find the resonance peak of interest But in practice it would make more sense to already have a small guess range in the span of a couple of MHz not more This will save the overall sweep time especially in cases where your resonator Q is low and therefore the peak would be close to the noise floor The Sweeper tab and Lock in tab setup is shown below The frequency sweeper can be found under the Sweeper tab UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 12 3 4 Tutorial Phase locked Loop Table 3 15 Settings acquire the reference signal Lock in Output Amp 2 V 100 0m ON Amplitudes Loen Signal Outovts fou fon Eeckin Demedulators ose ie Lookin pemoduators fe input senz Lookin Data Transfer fe amz ON Sweeper Senes sora Boa In this exercise we ar
163. g range etc The Oscillators section indicates the frequencies of both internal oscillators These frequencies can be either manually defined by typing a frequency value in the field or they can be referenced to an external source The Demodulators section holds the main settings for the Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 112 4 3 Lock in MF Tab 8 dual phase demodulator units Some of the available options like phase adjustment and the trigger functionality are collapsed by default It takes one mouse click icon in order to expand those controls On the right hand side of the Lock in tab the Signal Outputs section allows to define signal amplitudes offsets and range values The Scaling field below the Range field can be used to multiply the Signal Inout data to account for the gain of an external amplifier In case there is a gain of 10 applied to the input signal externally then the Scaling field can be set to 0 1 to compensate for it There are two buttons below the Scaling field that can be toggled the AC DC button and the 50 Q 1 MQ The AC DC button sets the coupling type AC coupling has a high pass cutoff frequency that can be used to block large DC signal components to prevent input signal saturation during amplification The 50 0 1 MQ button toggles the input impedance between low 50 Q and high approx 1 MQ input impedance 50 Q input impedance should be selected for signal frequencies above 10 MHz to avoid artifacts generated b
164. g is needed Please power cycle the device to resume normal operation Figure 1 27 Pop up Box indicating that the firmware was already up to date Close the UHF Firmware Upgrade Utility Click the Exit button to close the UHF Firmware Upgrade Utility If you encounter any issues whilst upgrading the UHF firmware please contact Zurich Instruments at Support zhinst com UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 41 1 7 Troubleshooting 1 7 Troubleshooting 1 7 1 List of trouble issues This section provides an easy to follow checklist and specific solution to the most common technical issues with the UHFLI Also keep this list in mind to avoid wrongly acquired measurement data The software cannot be installed or uninstalled please verify you have Windows administrator rights The Instrument does not turn on please verify the power supply connection the power on switch on the back panel of the instrument The Instrument has a very high input noise floor when connected to host computer by USB the USB cable connects the Instrument ground to computer ground which might cause crosstalk from computer noise to measurements results For situations where this is a problem it is recommended to use LAN if available connection instead of USB or achieve electrical isolation with the USB Ranger 2211 from Icron Technologies In house test has shown that by using the USB Ranger 2211 for USB connection between the PC and t
165. ger Input Output Bits Input Output Drive Panel InputLevel 500 Signal Drive 31 24 0x00 0x00 Front 250 1m V g Freq Demod 4 JA A 23 16 0x00 0x00 E Fron 100 1m v Bp FreqDemods E o O 15 8 0x00 0x00 Back 99 9mm Vm FreqDemod4 r 0x00 0x00 Back 99 97 vE m FreqDemods Format Hex Clock Internal 56MHz Figure 3 10 Configuring DIO 0 as reference input The default settings are chosen such that a standard 3 3 V TTL signal can be directly attached without further adjustments This can be easily tested by connecting a TTL reference signal to the outputs on the back panel A sketch of the modified setup is shown on Figure 3 11 You should now see as well that the oscillator 1 now tracks the frequency generated from oscillator 2 UH Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Aux Output Lan Clock USB TriggerOut Trigger In Aux In ZCtrl 1 2 1 2 1 2 OOG 00 a onan aoc Ooo Ge OOL Front Panel Back Panel BNC Figure 3 11 Referencing to a TTL signal using Ref Trigger Input 1 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 66 3 2 Tutorial External Reference 3 2 5 Using the Ref Trigger Input with TTL signals In this section you will modify the setup to use Ref Trigger Input 2 instrument front side as a entry port for TTL reference signal provided on Trigger Output 1 instrument backside A sketch of the modified setup is shown on Figure 3 12 UH Lock in Amplifier 600 MH
166. gger output is deasserted when the scope is waiting for the trigger condition to become satisfied Scope Active Trigger output is asserted when the scope has triggered and is recording data Scope Active Trigger output is deasserted when the scope has triggered and is recording data Width O s to 0 149 s Defines the minimal pulse width for trigger events signaled on the trigger outputs of the device Trigger drive ON OFF When on the bidirectional trigger on the front panelis in output mode When off the trigger is in input mode UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 160 4 14 Config Tab 4 14 Config Tab The Config tab is mainly a settings tabs and is available in all UHF Instruments 4 14 1 Features m define connection parameters to the instrument m browser session control m define Ul appearance grids theme etc m store and load instrument settings and UI settings m define data and data formats for recording data 4 14 2 Description The Config tab serves mainly as a control panel for all general LabOne related settings and is opened after start up by default Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 40 cpp icon and short description go Provides access to software configuration The config tab see Figure 4 22 is divided into 4 sections to control connections sessions user interface appearance and data re
167. gger time can be freely adjusted Low pass filtering of the trigger signal with an flexible UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 136 4 7 Software Trigger Tab 4 7 3 Bandwidth can help to improve trigger quality in cases of low signal to noise ratio Each trigger event is indicated by a green LED Most conveniently trigger levels can be automatically found by pressing the Find button Functional Elements Table 4 24 SW Trigger tab Control sub tab Run Stop E N Start and stop the software trigger Single Run the SW trigger once record Count trigger events Triggered grey green When green indicates that new trigger shots are being captured and displayed in the plot area For the Vertical Axis Groups please see Table 4 9 in the section called Vertical Axis Groups Table 4 25 SW Trigger tab Settings sub tab Trigger Type Analog edge triggering based on high and low level Hysteresis on the levels and low pass filtering can be used to reduce the risk of wrong trigger for noisy trigger signals Digital triggering on the 32 bit DIO lines The bit value defines the trigger conditions The bit mask controls the bits that are used for trigger evaluation For triggering just on DIOO use a bit value 0x0001 and a bit mask 0x0001 Triggers if a pulse on an analog signal is within the min and max pulse width Pulses can be defined as either low to high then high to low positive the reverse negative or bot
168. gree Linear combination of multiple amplitude settings on the same output are clipped to the range setting Note the value inserted by the user may be approximated to the nearest value Supported by the Instrument On ON OFF Main switch for the Signal Output corresponding to the blue LED indicator on the instrument front panel ON OFF Select the load impedance between 500 and HiZ The impedance of the output is always 50Q For a load impedance of 500 the displayed voltage is half the output voltage to reflect the voltage seen at the load 3 150 mV elects output range 150 mV i M ty elects output range 1 5 V Auto ee 15 _ Pa ects the most suited output range automatically Output Clipping srey red Indicates that the specified output ll Seas exceeds the range setting Signal clipping occurs and the output signal quality is degraded Adjustment of the range or the output amplitudes is required Offset range to range Defines the DC voltage that is added to the dynamic part of the output signal UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 119 4 4 Numeric Tab 4 4 Numeric Tab The Numeric Tab provides a powerful time domain based measurement display as introduced in Section 4 1 2 It is available in all UHF Instruments 4 4 1 Features m Display of demodulator output data and other streamed data e g auxiliary inputs auxiliary outputs PID errors Boxcar data demodulator frequencies AU data etc m G
169. gs regarding the auxiliary inputs and auxiliary outputs In Out Access to all controls relevant for the main Signal Inputs and Signal Outputs on the instrument s front Gives access to all controls relevant for the digital Sie inputs and outputs including the Ref Trigger connectors xB Provides access to software configuration Device Provides instrument specific settings eee UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 96 4 1 User Interface Overview Features all control and analysis capabilities of the PID controllers PLL Features all control and analysis capabilities of the phase locked loops Control panel to enable de modulation at linear combinations of oscillator frequencies Boxcar Boxcar settings and periodic waveform analyzer for fast input signals Out PWA Multi channel boxcar settings and measurement analysis for boxcar outputs L Table 4 4 gives a quick overview over the different status bar elements along with a short description Table 4 4 Status bar description Command log ast command Shows the last command A different formatting Matlab Python can be set in the config tab The log is also saved in User Documents Zurich Instruments LabOne WebServer Log Show Log Show Log Show the command log history in a separate Indicates the current session identifier devxxx Indicates the device serial number Next Calibration Time or M Remaining minutes until the first calibration is
170. h Tracking Edge Edge triggering with automatic adjustment of trigger levels to compensate for drifts The tracking speed is controlled by the bandwidth of the low pass filter For this filter noise rejection can only be achieved by level hysteresis HW Trigger Trigger on one of the four trigger inputs Ensure that the trigger level and the trigger coupling is correctly adjusted The trigger input state can be monitored on the plotter Tracking Pulse Pulse triggering with automatic adjustment of trigger levels to compensate for drifts The tracking speed is controlled by the bandwidth of the low pass filter For this filter noise rejection can only be achieved by level hysteresis Force x Forces a single trigger event UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments T37 4 7 Software Trigger Tab Trigger Signal X Y R Phase Source signal for trigger condition Frequency Aux In 1 2 Demod Number demodulator index Selection of the demodulator index Pulse Type Positive Select between negative positive or both pulse Negative Both forms in the signal to trigger on Trigger Edge Positive Triggers when the trigger input signal is crossing Negative Both the trigger level from either high to low low to high or both This field is only displayed for trigger type Edge and Tracking Edge Trigger Input Trigger Trigger on level crossings on hardware trigger inputs of the device Trigger Out Trigger changes send to the hardwa
171. h Instruments 182 4 18 MOD Tab referred to as carrier and one or multiple sidebands symmetrically placed around the carrier and termed sidebands Typical examples are amplitude modulated signals with one carrier component and two sidebands separated by the AM modulation frequency from the carrier Another example is frequency modulation where multiple sidebands left and right of the carrier can appear The relative strength of the sideband components for both examples depends on the modulation depth which is often expressed by the modulation index The classical approach of analysing such signals in particular when only analog instruments are available is to use a configuration called tandem demodulation This is essentially the serial concatenation of lock in amplifiers where the first device is referenced to the carrier frequency and outputs the in phase component which is then fed into the subsequent lock in amplifiers in order to extract the different sideband components There are several downsides to this scheme m The quadrature component of the first lock in tuned to the carrier has to be continuously zeroed out by adjusting the reference phase Otherwise a serious part of the signal power Is lost for the analysis which usually leads to a drop in SNR m he scheme scales badly in terms of the hardware resources needed in particular if multiple sideband frequencies need to be extracted Every time a signal enters anew Instrument o
172. h sample and discarding the rest The advantage to this method is its simplicity but the disadvantage is that the signal is undersampled because the input filter bandwidth of the UHF instrument is fixed at 600 MHz As a consequence the Nyquist sampling criterion is no longer satisfied and aliasing effects may be observed The default rate reduction mechanism of BW Limitation is illustrated by the bottommost signal in the figure BW Limitation means that for a rate reduction by a factor of N each sample produced by the Scope is computed as the average of N samples acquired at the maximum sampling rate The effective signal bandwidth is thereby reduced and aliasing effects are largely suppressed As can be seen from the figure with a rate reduction by a factor of 4 every output sample is simply computed as the average of 4 consequtive samples acquired at 1 8 GHz UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 126 4 6 Scope Tab Input signal Scope output 1 8 GSa s Scope output 450 MSa s decimation d 4p eeweeee A lt G Scope output 450 MSa s BW Limitation q e Figure 4 11 Illustration of how the Scope output is generated in BW Limitation and decimation mode when the sample rate is reduced from the default of 1 8 GSa s to 450 MSa s The Scope also offers an averaging filter that works on a shot to shot basis The functionality is implemented by means of an exponential moving av
173. he Instrument no USB switching activities on the PC can be detected on the measured noise floor The ground connection between the PC and the Instrument will be high impedance with this solution The Instrument performs poorly at low frequencies below 160 kHz with 50Q or below 100 Hz with 1 MQ coupling the signal inputs of the instrument might be set to AC operation Please verify to turn off the AC switch on the user interface The Instrument performs poorly during operation the demodulator filters might be set too wide too much noise or too narrow not enough signal for your application Please verify if the demodulator filter settings match your frequency versus noise plan The Instrument performs poorly during operation clipping of the input signal may be occurring This is detectable by monitoring the red LEDs on the front panels or on the status tab on the graphical user interface This can be avoided by adding enough margin on the input range setting for instance 50 to 70 of the maximum signal peak The Instrument performs strangely when working with the multi frequency MF options it is easy to turn on more signal generators than initially planned Check the generated Signal Output with the integrated oscilloscope and check the number of simultaneously activated oscillator voltages The Instrument performs close to specification but higher performance is expected after 2 years since the last calibration a few analog parame
174. he digitized waveform in the Scope can be jittery and noisy One must remember that the pulse is sampled at 1 8 GSa s which corresponds to a minimum resolution of 555 ps This resolution implies that in the zero crossing triggering the triggered point on the waveform will not be the same for every pulse This is indeed one major source of jitter observed The Scope comes with averaging and the persistence function which can in theory help to minimize jitter and noise To use the averaging mode one simply has to set Avg Filter field under Scope Display tab to Exp Moving Avg Then one can choose the number of Averages desired Below is the averaged pulse waveform at 10 points Compared to the previous non averaged waveform it can be seen that now the spikes are smoothed out UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 84 3 6 Tutorial PWA and Boxcar Averager 84 0mV Hl A 0 1001V Amplitude mV Scope Channel 1 0 6137us A 0 1021 us Time us Figure 3 29 Scope waveform with 10 exponential moving averages In order to observe the extent of jitter and noise one can use the Persistence mode Persistence can be enabled in the Display tab which overlaps the plot window in each triggered waveform The result of the persistence is shown in the graph below where the overlapped traces are in red One can measure an amplitude variation of about 7 mV and a time jitter of about 1 6 ns from the thickness of the red trace Under this con
175. he most recent 100 Save Save Save all trigger event based traces in the history to file Specify which device data to save in the Config Tab For the Math sub tab please see Table 4 7 in the section called Cursors and Math UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 139 4 8 Spectrum Analyzer Tab 4 8 Spectrum Analyzer Tab The Spectrum Analyzer is one of the powerful frequency domain measurement tools as introduced in Section 4 1 2 and is available in all UHF Instruments 4 8 1 Features m Fast high resolution FFT spectrum analyzer of demodulated data X iY R O and f dO dt m Variable center frequency frequency resolution and frequency span Auto bandwidth auto span sampling rate m Choice of 4 different FFT window functions Continuous and block wise acquisition with different types of averaging m Detailed noise power analysis m Support for Input Scaling and Input Units m Mathematical toolbox for signal analysis 4 8 2 Description The FFI spectrum analyzer is the main tool for doing frequency domain analysis on the demodulator output data that are streamed to the host PC with a user defined rate Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 27 a icon and short pees Provides FFT functionality to all continuously streamed measurement data The spectrum tab see Figure 4 15 is divided into a display sect
176. he selected Io Zoom area Save figure Generates an SVG of the plot area or areas for dual plots to the local download folder Save data Generates a TXT consisting of the displayed set i of samples Select full scale to save the complete wave The save data function only saves one shot at a time the last displayed wave UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 99 4 1 User Interface Overview Cursors and Math The plot area provides two X and two Y cursors which appear as dashed lines inside of the plot area The four cursors are selected and moved by means of the blue handles individually by means of drag and drop For each axis there is a primary cursor indicating its absolute position and a secondary cursor indicating both absolute and relative position to the primary cursor Cursors have an absolute position which does not change by pan or zoom events In case the cursors move out of the zoom area the corresponding handle is displays on the related side of the plot area Unless the handle is moved the cursor keeps the current position This functionality is very effective to measure large deltas with high precision as the absolute position of the other cursors does not move The cursor data can also be used to define the input data for the mathematical operations performed on plotted data This functionality is available in the Math sub tab of each tool The following Table 4 7 gives an overview of all the elements and th
177. header For example setting the filter order to 4 corresponds to a roll off of 24 dB oct or 80 dB dec i e an attenuation of 10 for a tenfold frequency increase If the Low Pass Filter bandwidth is comparable to or larger than the demodulation frequency the demodulator output may contain frequency components at the frequency of demodulation and its higher harmonics In this case the additional Sinc Filter can be enabled It attenuates those unwanted harmonic components in the demodulator output UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 113 4 3 Lock in MF Tab 4 3 3 The Sinc Filter is also useful when measuring at low frequencies since it allows to apply a Low Pass Filter bandwidth closer to the demodulation frequency thus speeding up the measurement time Each demodulator is activated by the En button in the Data Transfer section where also the sampling rate Rate for each demodulator can be defined The Trigger section next to the Data Transfer allows for setting trigger conditions in order to control and initiate data transfer from the Instrument to the host PC by the application of logic signals e g TTL to either Trigger Input 3 or 4 on the back panel The Output Amplitudes sections is only available for Instruments with the UHF MF option installed and allows for the flexible adjustment of output amplitudes of different demodulators and their summation on either Signal Output 1 or Signal Output 2 In order to avoid sig
178. hem Note Please note the change of units of the scaling factor depending on what measurement signal is chosen Two Aux Output Levels on the right again provides 4 graphical and 4 numerical indicators to monitor the voltages currently set on the auxiliary outputs UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 154 Auxiliary Tab Config x Device X Aux X Lock in X Add Row x Aux Input Aux Output Aux Output Levels Input 1 Input 2 Signal Channel Preoffset Scale Offset 2 Value Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 a an 1 Demod X yi 35 09890008m WV 1 000k 0 000 V 5 0 104 V aH on an LA i ai 2 PID Out yi sy 100 00000099m V 1 000 40 000 V 0 100 V 4 a Pa cil o i 3 Boxcar yi sy 0 00000000 V 12 80k V 0 000 V Z 0 000 V 3 ad 0 Bi R 4 Manual v D4 0 00000000 V 0 000 2 000 V 42 000 v zj Si ei 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 104 V 0 102 V 0 104 V 0 100 V 0 000 V 2 000 V Figure 4 19 LabOne Ul Auxiliary tab 4 11 3 Functional Elements Table 4 36 Auxiliary tab Auxiliary Input 10 Vto 10 V Vol ae measured at the Auxiliary Input rear Voltage panel Signal Ke io Select any of the 4 demodulator output quantities of any of the demodulators for auxiliary output PID Out Use one of the PID controllers output UHF PID option needs to be installed PID Shift Use one of the PID controllers shift results UHF PID option needs to be installed Boxcar Select one of the two Boxcar units for auxiliary outp
179. ho doy The Scope tool now displays single shots of Signal Input 1 with a temporal distance given by the Hold off Time The scales on top and on the right of the graphs indicate the zoom level for orientation The icons on the left and below the figure give access to the main scaling properties and allow to store the measurement data as a SVG image file or plain data text file Moreover panning can be achieved by clicking and holding the left mouse button inside the graph while moving the mouse Note Zooming in and out along the horizontal dimension can by achieved with the mouse wheel for the vertical zoom the shift key needs to be pressed and again the mouse wheel can by used for adjustments Having set the Input Range to 1 V ensures that no signal clipping occurs If you set the Input Range to 0 2 V clipping can be seen immediately on the scope window accompanied by a red error flag on the status bar in the lower right corner of the LabOne User Interface At the same time the LED next to the Signal Input 1 BNC connector on the instruments front pan will turn red The error flag can be cleared by pressing the clear button marked with the letter C onthe right side of the status bar after setting the Input Range back to 1 V The Scope is avery handy tool for checking quickly the quality of the input signal Users can either use Scope to adjust the optimal input range setting or to check if the software trigger level is set correctly The
180. hosen in the external reference mode although they are not exactly to be considered as an external reference They are useful in the case of tandem demodulation where the result of a first lock in operation is fed into a second lock in typically at a lower frequency For this tutorial Sig In 1 is selected as the external reference for Demodulator 4 i e under the Signal column and activated by selecting ExtRef in the Reference Mode column Table 3 9 Settings choosing trigger source and switch to external reference mode As a result the oscillator 1 frequency indicator in the Oscillator section almost immediately changes from 10 MHz to 30 MHz Once the external reference mode has been enabled the frequency of oscillator 1 changes continuously adapting to the frequency of the external UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 63 3 2 Tutorial External Reference reference signal This can be verified by changing the frequency of oscillator 2 and noting how the frequency of oscillator 1 follows A green indicator appears besides the reference selection for channel 1 indicating that the instrument has locked to an external reference Graphically this can be nicely viewed in the Plotter by displaying the frequency of Demodulator 1 and then changing the frequency of the oscillator 2 in quantities of say 1 kHz Table 3 10 Settings displaying demodulator reference frequency over time Plotter Tree f Input Signal O sample Fr
181. host computer per second UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 152 4 10 Arithmetic Unit Tab e i a demodulator X for Cartesian AU only Use demodulator Y for Cartesian AU only Use demodulator R for polar AU only Use demodulator for polar AU only R C1 iC2 Use the magnitude of C1 iC2 for polar AU a O C1 iC2 Use the angle of C1 iC2 for polar AU only Channel index Select demodulator and or Boxcar channel number Coeff 1 A coefficient of 1 is used default Auxin fThe signal on Aux In 1 is used as coefficient AuxIn2 Tre signal on Aux In 2 is used as coefficient Output of Cartesian AU 1 C1 is used as coefficient for Cartesian AU only Output of Cartesian AU 2 C2 is used as coefficient for Cartesian AU only Output of Polar AU 1 P1 is used as coefficient for Polar AU only Output of Polar AU 2 P2 is used as coefficient for Polar AU only Real Realnumber Custom sca a Shows the result of the arithmetic unit Result unit Text Shows the unit of the result of the arithmetic unit If the unit formula is not valid it will be indicated as Invalid and invalid formula can be corrected by adjusting scaling units Overflo Text When red indicates that an overflow has occurred in the arithmetic unit UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 153 4 11 Auxiliary Tab 4 11 Auxiliary Tab The Auxiliary tab is mainly a settings tabs dedicated t
182. icated below Preparation This tutorial explains how to perform demodulation using an external reference frequency An external reference will be simulated by using one of the UHFLI internal oscillators The signal from this internal oscillator will be fed to one of the signal outputs and then fed back in using various connections in order to reference another internal oscillator used for demodulation First of all connect the Signal Output 2 connector to both Signal Input 1 and to the Ref Trigger Input 1 connector using two BNC cables and a BNC T junction The measurement setup is shown in the following figure U H Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Aux Output O0 OOOO Front Panel Figure 3 4 External reference on Signal Input 2 Connect the cables as described above Make sure the UHFLI is powered on and then connect the UHFLI through the USB to your PC or to your local area network LAN where the host computer resides After starting LabOne the default web browser opens with the LabOne graphical user interface The tutorial can be started with the default instrument configuration e g after a power cycle and the default user interface settings i e as is after pressing F5 in the browser Generate the Test Signal In this section you generate a 30 0 MHz signal oscillating between 0 V and 0 5 V on Output 2 for use as the external reference The Lock in settings for generati
183. icates that the calibration has not been executed yet After a warm up and temperature settling period of approximately 16 minutes a self calibration is executed and the CAL flag turns gray If the self calibration is disabled the CAL flag turns red after the warm up period to indicate that no calibration was run m Gray off The gray CAL flag indicates that the device is self calibrated The CAL flag turns red when the temperature change is larger than a given threshold or the time since the last calibration is longer than a given time interval The values of these thresholds are indicated in the device tab m Red The red CAL flag indicates that it is recommended to run a Self calibration The self calibration is never executed automatically inthis state The CAL flag is red either when the device experienced a temperature change which is larger than a given threshold or when the time since the last calibration is longer than a given time interval By executing a self calibration the CAL flag will turn gray UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 212 Glossary This glossary provides easy to understand descriptions for many terms related to measurement instrumentation including the abbreviations used inside this user manual A A D AC ADC AM Amplitude Modulated AFM AM AFM API ASCII Atomic Force Microscope AFM AVAR B Bandwidth BW BNC C UHF User Manual Analog to Digital see Also A
184. id data m Boxcar Reporting of the current data streaming rate A more detailed list of all technical changes can be found in the LabOne release notes Revision 26210 30 Sep 2014 Document update of all chapters to comply with the changes of the 14 08 product release Highlights of the changes and additions to the UHFLI product are m Arithmetic Unit anew tab that allows the control of 4 arithmetic units m Sinc filter for Sweeper increases speed of sweeps at low frequencies m Scope trigger performance functionality and display have been further improved m Scope dual channel support requires UHF DIG Digitizer option Scope improved averaging and persistence refresh handling m Sweeper now supports data provided from the pid boxcar and arithmetic unit m Sweeper simultaneous display of multiple traces Sweeper additional application mode to support 3 omega measurements UHF PID PID option low pass filter for the D part now accessible in the user interface m Auxiliary outputs can now output also the PID shift e g frequency adjustment ina PLL UHF MOD Modulation option full access to phase timeconstant and filter order for the individual side bands m UHF BOX Boxcar option averaging replaces the integration provides better usability and more intuitive behavior m New Harmonics Analyzer for UHF BOX option bar chart display for FFT of periodic waveform analyzer A more detailed list of all technical changes can be fo
185. ignal is sampled at a rate of 1 8 GSa s Depending on the phase of the reference oscillator and the set Start Phase and Window Width each of these samples is added up and output from the Adder after each period From there one branch is directly connected to the outPWA see Section 4 20 for a further step of synchronous detection The other signal path way is subject to a Moving Average filter that allows to average over an adjustable number of reference oscillator periods Note The moving average filter provides up to 512 intermittent results That means if Averaging Periods is set to 1024 the Output is updated with a new value every second oscillator period whereas for smaller numbers of averaging Periods this update is performed on every cycle Another big advantage of the Zurich Instruments Boxcar is the graphical display of the input signal termed Periodic Waveform Analyzer Each Boxcar unit is equipped with a PWA unit that can be either bound to the Boxcar settings or used on any other signal input and oscillator independently Figure 4 33 shows a block diagram of the PWA Periodic Waveform Analyzer Phase Shift Harmonic Phase To Address x A Sample Samples Counter per Shot Start Phase Oscillators Osc Select Sampling Adjustment Averager 450 MSa s D i Aux Inputs i3 E Count gt Pull Push Aux Outputs iii SH ppg CELE Joa Data Input Select Sample Counter Figure 4 33 Periodic Waveform Ana
186. ion and a settings section subdivided into anumber of tabs Scope x Numeric Xx Spectrum x AddRow x 800 600 400 200 200 400 600 800 Settings Math gt Signal Input E Demodulator x i Mode FFT X iY Power Spectral Density il Sample Rate Hz 1 717k h Center Freq Hz 10 00000000M ak j j j liri A i Y Wiel j hr Hyatt Pija yi ty Why MV ah hh Hi nN Uw Aliasing Reject dB 39 2 v FFT Length pts 1024 y 100 n o v Log 8 att aih ne mj h oft i f Ne wy Er Mr Ah Window Hann vey yn ry ih j Mr yi Mio Ht it yy iN pagni ME P Overlap 0 00 Filter Compensation ol i Absolute Frequency o 0 200 400 600 800 Histogram Frequency Hz Figure 4 15 LabOne UI Spectrum analyzer tab UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 140 4 8 Spectrum Analyzer Tab The FFT spectrum analyzer allows for spectral analysis of all the demodulator data by performing the Fourier transform on the complex demodulator data samples X iY with i as the imaginary unit As the demodulation process shifts the spectrum of the input signal by the demodulation frequency and the Fourier transform of the demodulated X iY corresponds to the frequency spectrum of the input signal around the demodulation frequency we have effectively an FFT analyzer that focuses on a narrow frequency range around the demodulation frequency FFT spectrum analyzer and Scope FFT coincide
187. ion of the device internal controller software FX2 USB USB firmware revision Installed Options short names Options that are installed on this device for each option Install Install Click to install options on this device Requires a unique feature code and a power cycle after entry Clock Source Internal Internal 10 MHz clock is used as the frequency and time base reference Clk 10 MHz An external 10 MHz clock is used as the frequency and time base reference Provide a clean and stable 10 MHz reference to the appropriate back panel connector Jumbo Frames ON OFF Enables jumbo frames 4k on the TCP IP interface This will reduce the load on the PC and is required to achieve maximal throughput Make sure that jumbo frames 4k are enabled on the network card as well If one of the devices on the network is not able to work with jumbo frames the connection will fail Enabled ON OFF Enables an automatic instrument self calibration about 16 min after start up In order to guarantee the full specification it is recommended to perform a self calibration after warm up of the device Time interval time in seconds Time interval for which the self calibration is valid After this time it is recommended to rerun the auto calibration A LED indicator in the status bar indicates when another self calibration is recommended Calibration temperature in C When the temperature changes by the specified temperature amount it i
188. ision 28900 Zurich Instruments 50 2 3 Back Panel Tour 2 3 Back Panel Tour The back panel is the main interface for power control service and connectivity to other Zl instruments Please refer to Figure 2 3 and Table 2 2 for the detailed description of the items C No user serviceable parts inside Refer to user manual for safety notice AC 100 240V 50 60Hz 150W Max Fuse 250V 2A For use by qualified personnel only Maintain ground to avoid electrical shock O 4 O O X2 10GbE LAN 1GbE Clk 10 MHz USB2 0 TriggerOut Trigger In DIO 32bit SVTTL 500 500 Zurich Instruments AG Made in Switzerland A 3 cle Flo le lah ly klini lole lor Figure 2 3 UHF Instrument back panel Table 2 2 UHF Instrument back panel description Position Label Name Description ventilator important keep clear from obstruction ventilator important keep clear from obstruction Power inlet power inlet with ON OFF switch Earth ground 4mm banana jack connector for earth ground electrically connected to the chassis and the earth pin of the power inlet DIO 32 bit digital input output connector X2 10GbE 10 Gbit LAN connector LAN 1GbE 1 Gbit LAN connector Clk 10 MHz In clock input 10 MHz to be used for synchronization from external instruments Clk 10 MHz Out clock output 10 MHz to be used for synchronization of external instruments USB universal serial bus host co
189. izes the X output zeros the Y output zeros the output and leaves the R output unchanged Zero Z Adjust the sideband demodulator phase automatically in order to read zero degrees Shifts the phase of the reference at the input of the sideband demodulator in order to achieve zero phase atthe demodulator output This action maximizes the X output zeros the Y output zeros the output and leaves the R output unchanged Filter order used for carrier demodulation Filter order used for sideband demodulation TC BW Value numeric value Defines the low pass filter characteristic in the unit defined above for the carrier demodulation TC BW Value numeric value Defines the low pass filter characteristic in the unit defined above for the sideband demodulation Frequency Hz O to 600 MHz Sets the frequency of the carrier Frequency Hz O to 600 MHz Frequency offset to the carrier from the first sideband Frequency Hz O to 600 MHz Frequency offset to the carrier from the second sideband Demod Freq Hz O to 600 MHz Carrier frequency used for the demodulation and signal generation on the carrier demodulator Demod Freq Hz O to 600 MHz Absolute frequency used for demodulation and signal generation on the first sideband demodulator UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 100 4 18 MOD Tab Demod Freq Hz O to 600 MHz Absolute frequency used for demodulation and signal generation on the second sideband demodulator
190. l Pass DUT model function with Gain 1 and a Delay set to 0 The PID bandwidth will then be indicated below the PID parameters in the advisor section Using DUT model functions with the PID Advisor For many experimental situations the external device or DUT that needs to be controlled can be well approximated by a simple model At the moment LabOne offers a number of different choices all of the providing a setting for the delay that occurs outside the instrument Depending on the servo bandwidth one is aiming for the external delay can often be the limiting factor and should be sensibly chosen Note The delay specified for each model resembles the earliest possible response for a step change of the instrument output to be seen on the Instrument input It describes the causality of the system UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 171 4 16 PID Tab and does not affect the shape of the DUT transfer function Standard BNC cables cause a signal delay of about 5 ns m Now the most simple approach to modeling is to assume a DUT with a unity transfer function by using All Pass The low pass filters allow for limiting the bandwidth to set an overall gain and a damping for the second order filter Resonator Frequency is a model that applies wellin situations with a passive external component e g a AFM cantilever a quartz resonator whose frequency should be tracked by a PLL and excited at resonance frequency also when it is changing o
191. lement section X range Config x Device x Aux Xx Lock in x AddRow X Signal Inputs Oscillators Demodulators Signal Outputs leste enteri araea Meee Reference Frequencies Input Low Pass Filters Data Transfer Hp Input 1 a 1E Mode Frequency Hz Mode Osc Harm Demod Freq Hz 3 Signal Order BW 3 dB Sinc EE En Rate Sa s EE A Output 1 imi Range 100 0m 1 Manual 10 00000000M 1 Demod vy ivf 1 10 00000000mM q Siginl v 3 100 1 3 g 1 717k a On O 500 Scaling 1 VIV Manual 10 00000000M 2 Demod v iv 1 10 00000000M Siginl 3 100 1 5 1 717k Range 15V v AC 509 g 245 3 Demod v iv a l 10 00000000M Sigin1 v 3 100 1 1 717k 4 Offset V 0 000 100 4 Demod v i 1 10 00000000M Siginl v 3 100 1 4 1 717k j Amp Vpk 100 0m Input 2 H i Output 2 Range 1 0 sl 5 Demod v 2 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 g 1 717k On 500 O Scaling 1 viy 6 Demod v 27 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 1 717k Range 15V v AC 509 g 7 Demod vy 2 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 o 1 717k Offset V 0 000 m 8 Demod v 2 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 A 4 717k Amp Vpk 100 0m pJ Scope x Numeric x AddRow x i i i i i Control Trigger Advanced Math S Force E Scope Chi Wav4 3 Scope Ch2 Wave l l Horizontal Mode Time Domain v Sampling Rate 1 80GHz Length pts 4096 Vertical Channel 1 Signal Input 1 Tal
192. level of the selected Trigger input In this selection the sample rate field determines the frequency in which demodulated samples are sent to the host computer Amplitude Unit Vok Vrms dBm Select the unit of the displayed amplitude value The dBm value is only valid for a system with 50 Q termination UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 110 4 2 Lock in Tab On ON OFF Main switch for the Signal Output corresponding to the blue LED indicator on the instrument front panel ON OFF Select the load impedance between 500 and HiZ The impedance of the output is always 50Q For a load impedance of 500 the displayed voltage is half the output voltage to reflect the voltage seen at the load 150 mV elects output range 150 mV elects output range 1 5 V Auto a Selects the most suited output range automatically Output Clipping srey red Indicates that the specified output o exceeds the range setting Signal clipping occurs and the output signal quality is degraded Adjustment of the range or the output amplitudes is required Offset range to range Defines the DC voltage that is added to the dynamic part of the output signal Output range to range Defines the output amplitude for each demodulator frequency as rms or peak to peak value A negative amplitude value is equivalent to a phase change of 180 degree Demodulator 2 is the signal source for Signal Output 1 demodulator 4 is the source for
193. locked The PLL error is sampled at 5 Sa s and its absolute value is calculated If the result is smaller than 5 degrees the loop is considered locked UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 180 AAS PEG Lap Control Tool Option Range Description Freq Shift Hz numeric value Current frequency shift of the PLL Oscillator Freq Center Freq Copy the current PLL settings to the PLL Advisor Phase Unwrap ON OFF Enables the phase error unwrapping up to 32pi Advanced Mode ON OFF Enables manual tuning of the PID parameters The stability is reported and the frequency response is shown on the plots Application Open Loop select PLL Advisor mode Currently only one mode is Supported Target BW Hz 0 1 Hzto 84kHz Requested PLL bandwidth Higher loop filter bandwidth can be attained by manual tuning only Advise Advise Calculate PLL settings based on application mode and given settings Demod BW Hz numeric value Demodulator bandwidth used for the PLL loop filter 1 to 8 Demodulator order used for the PLL loop filter numeric value numeric value PLL Advisor integral gain numeric value PLL Advisor differential gain D 109 9 kHz to 14 MHz PLL Advisor sampling rate of the PLL control loop PM deg numeric value Simulated phase margin of the PLL with the current settings The phase margin should be greater than 45 deg and preferably greater than 65 deg for stable conditions Advisor stability
194. lyzer block diagram UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 189 4 19 Boxcar Tab The user can select from a variety of different input signals all of which will be re sampled either up or down where no averaging is provided at the input to a sampling rate of 450 MSa s Depending on the phase of the reference oscillator each data sample is associated to one of 1024 memory units which records the average values and the number of samples These 1024 can be spread over the entire 360 degree of the reference oscillator period or asmaller span by using the Zoom mode After an adjustable number of total inout samples the entire memory is transfered to the PC and the memory is reset Each shot of data contains 1024 average values and sample counts each associated to a certain phase window In case the reference frequency is sufficiently stable over the course of one shot it makes perfect sense to switch from the phase domain view to the time domain which for some experiments might be the more natural way of consideration 4 19 3 Functional Elements Table 4 52 Boxcar tab PWA sub tab Run Stop Continuously run and stop PWA acquisition oscillator index Select reference oscillator for PWA signal acquisition PWA Frequency numeric valu Actual frequency at which the PWA operates based on set oscillator frequency and harmonic scaling factor Commensurability grey red Traffic light showing whether the number of samples acquired i
195. m Outputs Oy continous data stream Spectrum Sweeper 1 8 GSa s Demodulator Ref a E Plotter g86r 7 igger l Trigge 450 MSa S SW Trigger Inputs 2X 100 kSa s Auxiliary PWA Harmonic Inout oe d d es Analyzer Trigger LAN Engine shot wise Signal Scope Trigger data transfer EFT Input 78 Gsa s 128 MS Figure 2 4 UHF Instrument main functional blocks and associated signal pathways The main goal is to illustrate how much complexity can be absorbed by a single instrument and to inspire users finding our new uses cases by combining the different entities in new ways The colors of the signal paths are arbitrary and meant to increase contrast but have no technical meaning Also the plot neither aims for completeness or ultimate accuracy UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 52 2 0 Ordering Guide 2 5 Ordering Guide Table 2 3 provides an overview of the available UHF products Upgradeable features are options that can be purchased anytime without need to send the Instrument to Zurich Instruments Table 2 3 UHF Instrument product codes for ordering Product code Product name Description Upgrade inthe field possible UHF PID UHF PID Quad PID PLL option Controller UHF MOD UHF MOD AM FM option Modulation UHF RUB UHF RUB Rubidium option Atomic Clock UHFLI UHFLI UHFLI UHF MF UHF PID UHF MF UHF PID yes yes yes yes yes no yes Table 2 4 Product selector n External
196. me domain data display for all continuously streamed data m 6 different trigger types m Automatic trigger level determination m Simulators display of multiple traces m Adjustable record history Mathematical toolkit for signal analysis Description The software trigger tab serves mainly to display data sets shot wise after defined trigger events occurred Whenever closed or anew instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 23 cpp icon and short eee a SW Provides complex trigger functionality on all wie continuously streamed data samples and time domain display The software trigger tab see Figure 4 14 is divided into a display section and a settings section subdivided into a number of tabs Scope x Numeric x SW Trig x Add Row x Control Settings History Math Demodulator 1 R Triggered Amplitude mV Vertical Axis Groups Signal Type Channel Demod X vj1 Amplitude V a Drop signal here for new group Drop signal group here to remove D a Ov Did o amp Time ms ele o Figure 4 14 LabOne UI Software trigger tab The software trigger brings the trigger functionality of a scope to the continuously streamed data that can be viewed with the Plotter tool in a roll mode The user can choose between a variety of different trigger options for the different signal inputs Also the recording Duration and the Delay pre tri
197. measurement data as traces over time roll mode The plotter tab see Figure 4 9 is divided into a display section and a control tab section Scope Xx Numeric xX Plotter x AddRow x o Control Tree Settings Math Demodulator 1 R Demodulator 2 R Select a Preset n Enabled Demods Cartesian Enabled Demods Polar Amplitude mV Boxcars I X2 0 000 s A 0 000s PID Errors I ANANAMANAMAAA VV Vertical Axis Groups Signal Type Channel Demod X voi AN Uw Amplitude V o Demodulator 1 R m Drop signal here for new group Drop signal group here to remove w wv id id 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 Time s DA An E EE Figure 4 9 LabOne Ul Plotter tab The plotter can be used to observe the changes of demodulated data and other streamed data continuously over time Just as in the numeric tab any continuously streamed quantity can be UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 122 4 5 Plotter Tab 4 9 3 displayed as for instance R O X Y frequency PID errors etc New signals can be added by either using the quick add tool on the Presets sub tab or by going through the tree and selecting every signal of interest in the tree structure The vertical and horizontal axis can be displayed in Lin Log or dB scale The Plotter display can be zoomed in and out with the magnifier symbols or through Man Manual Auto Automatic and FS Full S
198. meter Stop unit numeric value Stop value of the sweep parameter The unit adapts according to the selected sweep parameter Length integer value Sets the number of measurement points Progress Oto 100 Reports the sweep progress as ratio of points recorded Sweep Param Oscillator Frequency Selects the parameter to be swept Navigate through the tree view that appears and click on the required parameter Note the available Demodulator Phase signal Output selection depends on the configuration of the Amplitude device Auxiliary Output Offset PID Setpoint Modulation Index Carrier Amplitude Sideband 1 Amplitude Sideband 2 Amplitude Boxcar Integration Delay Boxcar Integration Time Signal Output Offset Sweep Mode Sequential sweep from Start to Stop value Binary Non sequential sweep continues increase of resolution over entire range Bidirectional Sequential sweep from Start to Stop value and back to Start again Reverse sweep from Stop to Start value Log ON OFF Selects between linear and logarithmic distribution of the sweep parameter numeric value Reporting of the remaining time of the current Sweep Dual Plot ON OFF Toggle between single plot view and dual plot view For the Vertical Axis Groups please see Table 4 9 in the section called Vertical Axis Groups UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 147 4 9 Sweeper Tab Table 4 31 Sweeper tab Settings sub tab Filt
199. mpact on the sample rate on the auxiliary outputs connectors Note the value inserted by the user may be approximated to the nearest value supported by the instrument Demodulator Output Makes all demodulator output rates equal Rate Lock Pressing the lock copies the settings from demodulator one into the settings of all demodulators When the lock Is pressed any modification to a field is immediately changing all other settings Releasing the lock does not change any setting and permits to individually UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 117 4 3 Lock in MF Tab adjust the demodulator output rate for each demodulator Trigger Continuous selects continuous data acquisition mode The demodulated samples are streamed to the host computer at the Rate indicated on the left hand side In continuous mode the numerical and plotter tools are continuously receiving and display new values Trigger 3 Selects external triggering by means of the Trigger 3 connector Demodulated samples are sent to the host computer for each event defined in the Trig Mode field When edge trigger is selected the rate field is greyed out and has no meaning Note some UHF Instruments feature Trigger 1 2 on the back panel instead of Trigger 3 4 Trigger 4 Selects external triggering by means of the Trigger 4 connector Demodulated samples are sent to the host computer for each event defined in the Trig Mode field When edge trigger is selected
200. mplitude is no longer 80 mV peak but rather around 40 mV One has to remember that we have now an amplitude modulated pulse and the PWA is showing the average amplitude of these pulses over time If one decreases the number of averages in PWA then an amplitude fluctuating behaviour can be observed more clearly A 40 7mV Amplitude mV l l 4 117 9deg Input PWA 1 Waveform l 128 1deg j A10 2deg l l l l l l l _ 0 0000V Figure 3 39 Carrier pulse in PWA As shown previously the Boxcar tool can be used to obtain the integrated pulse energy over a pre defined gate width This integrated value will of course be amplitude modulated as well Now the Output PWA can be used to recover this envelope of the integrated value To do this one now has to place an instance of the Out PWA tool on the LabOne web interface The settings of the Output PWA are given below Table 3 25 Settings observe the pulse waveform ourPwa Sertngs Sienalinout 1 ____ RaniSteop One should be able to observe a sine wave similar to the one shown below The Vs magnitude is proportional to the AM modulation depth One can verify this by changing the AM depth to 50 see second screen shot The envelope magnitude indeed decreased by a factor of 2 Out PWA acts like a multi channel boxcar that can be used to do multiple sideband analysis The UHF MF option may be required to observe more than one modulation freque
201. mputer connection Trigger Out 3 digital TTL trigger output note some UHF Instruments indicate Trigger 1 on the back panel instead of Trigger 3 Trigger Out 4 digital TTL trigger output note some UHF Instruments indicate Trigger 2 on the back panel instead of Trigger 4 Trigger In 3 digital trigger input note some UHF Instruments indicate Trigger 1 on the back panel instead of Trigger 3 Trigger In 4 digital trigger input note some UHF Instruments indicate Trigger 2 on the back panel instead of Trigger 4 Aux In 1 auxiliary input Aux In 2 auxiliary input ZCtrl 1 peripheral pre amplifier power amp control bus attention this is not an Ethernet plug connection to an Ethernet network might damage the Instrument peripheral pre amplifier power amp control bus attention this is not an Ethernet plug connection to an Ethernet network might damage the Instrument UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 51 2 4 Signalling pathways diagram 2 4 Signalling pathways diagram The following diagram illustrates the UHF s various signal inputs signal outputs functional blocks along with the multitude of signalling pathways Inside the instrument and towards the host computer Analog and Fast digital signal Data link LabOne data server digital interface processing on FPGA to PC web server amp toolset 14 MSa s Auxiliary 14 MSa s Signal Outputs inane OSC 450 MSa S 8 iee Trigger LAN OSC Out OSC In Nu
202. n the port is not active and must be switched on in order to be used Two activation methods are supported m Manual switch in the user interface m Manual switch by shorting the ZCtrl_Detect and Device_Ground these pins should be floating against ZCtrl_GND and ZCtrl_PWR Th ZCtrl port can be connected with an RJ45 connector therefore non crossed Ethernet cables can be used for convenient interfacing Warning Connection to a Ethernet might damage the UHF Instrument Figure 5 3 The pinout of the ZCtrl port Table 5 13 DIO port pin assignment ZCtrl_Power power pin for external use Po a a connected to earth pin ZCtrl_Power power pin for external use 14 5V 100 mA ZCtrl_GND reference ground pin for ZCtrl_Power and ZCtrl_Power UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 208 5 4 Performance Diagrams 5 4 Performance Diagrams Many of the parameters mentioned in Section 5 2 are valid without specific conditions Other parameters instead are typical specifications because they depend on several parameters such as the current range setting the input termination and or the frequency This section completes the previous chapters with detailed performance diagrams in order to support the validation of applications Ci N ra gt U C O i O Cc eb O O gt Q H HtHt i I I L 4 L I T L 1 1 I 1 L 1 1 1 I 1 L i I
203. n associate both sections MOD 1 and 2 to the same Signal Input UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 183 4 18 MOD Tab Note Whenever MOD 1 2 are enabled all the associated settings in the Lock in tab that are controlled by the MOD Option will be set to read only On top of signal analysis the MOD option can also be utilized for signal generation The Generation section provides all the necessary controls to adjust for the amplitudes and modulation properties Note FM signals are generated by coherent superposition of the carrier signal with two sideband frequencies on either side that have the same amplitudes but opposite phases The phase shift is achieved by using negative amplitudes as displayed in the lock in tab This FM generation method approximates true FM as long as the modulation index is well below 1 i e higher order sidebands can be neglected For a modulation index of 1 true FM provides more than 13 of signal power in the second and higher order sidebands More details regarding AM and FM signal analysis and generation can also be found on the Zurich Instruments web page e g http www zhinst com blogs sadik 2014 02 sideband analysis 4 18 3 Functional Elements Table 4 50 MOD tab ON OFF Enable the modulation AM FM manual Select the modulation mode Mode Off Sideband is disabled The sideband demodulator behaves like a normal demodulator Sideband right to the carrier Sideband left to the
204. n be activated in the user interface and run concurrently and will correctly interfere with each other Table 4 29 App icon and short description Sweeper Allows to scan one variable of a wide choice gp an e g frequency over a defined range and display various response functions including statistical operations UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 144 4 9 Sweeper Tab Scope x Numeric Xx Sweeper x Add Row x j 10 10 49 Control Settings History Math Horizontal Start Hz 1 00000000k g F X2 1 0000 fHz A 0 0000 fHz Stop Hz 1 00000000M Length pts 100 100 Amplitude dBV Sweep Param Osc 1 Frequency A Sweep Mode Sequential v Log iz Remaining s 0 Dual Piot fe Vertical Axis Groups Signal Type Channel 8 Demod R v1 v Amplitude V 2 _ Demodulator 1R Drop signal here for new group Fe Drop signal group here to remove Y2 300 00 dBV m A 0 00 dBV 10 10 Frequency Hz Figure 4 16 LabOne UI Sweeper tab A typical use of the Sweeper is to perform frequency sweeps over a well defined frequency range and generate a response of the device under test in the form of a Bode plot As an example AFM and MEMS users require to efficiently identify the resonance frequency of their devices as well as the phase delay The sweeper can also be used to sweep parameters other than frequency for instance amplitudes and offsets e g a sweep of the auxiliary output offset
205. n the user interface Once sufficient data has been recorded the Scope will transition to the Armed state In this state the Scope is ready to accept the trigger signal Note that the Scope will continue to record data for as long as itis inthe Armed state and that if no trigger is defined the Scope will simply pass straight through the Armed state Once the input signal passes the Trigger level the Scope will trigger and atthe same time its state will change from Armed to Active The Scope will remain in the Active state where it also records data until sufficient data has been recorded to fulfill the Length requirement configured in the user interface Once enough data has been acquired the Scope will transition back into the Idle state where It will wait for the time configured with the Holdoff time before it either starts the next measurement automatically in case Run is active or waits for the user to reactivate it The trigger source selector allows information about the Scope state to be reproduced on the Trigger Output in a number of ways The signal that will appear on the output is shown with the six bottommost traces in the figure Note that these traces are shown as digital signals with symbolic values of logic 0 and 1 These values will of course be actual voltages when measured on the device itself First if Scope Trigger is selected then the trigger output will have a signal that is asserted which means that it goes high when the
206. nal clipping the sum of amplitudes of each signal output needs to be smaller than the range defined in the Signal Outputs section on the right By clicking the headline of each column one can switch between amplitude definitions in terms of root mean square values peak to peak values or even units of dBm when the 50 Q option in the Signal Output section is activated In the Signal Outputs section the On buttons allow to activate each of the Signal Outputs of the front panel The Range drop down list is used to select the proper output range setting On each Signal Output a digital offset voltage Offset can be defined The maximum output signal permitted is 1 5 V The block diagram given in Figure 4 6 indicates the main demodulator components and their interconnection The understanding of the wiring is essential for successful operating the instrument Functional Elements Table 4 13 Lock in MF tab aa 10 mV to 1 5 V Defines the gain of the analog input amplifier The range should exceed the incoming signal by roughly a factor two including a potential DC offset Note 1 the value inserted by the user may be approximated to the nearest value supported by the Instrument Note 2 a proper choice of range setting is crucial in order to achieve good accuracy and best possible signal to noise ratio as it targets to use the full dynamic range of the input ADC Auto Automatic adjustment of the Range to about two times the maximum signal inpu
207. nalysis Fast signals 1 8 GSa s Oscilloscope Scope Tab FFT Analyzer Scope Tab Periodic Waveform Analyzer Multi Harmonic Analyzer Boxcar Tab Boxcar Tab Slow signals lt 28 MSa s Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Tab Software Trigger Multi harmonic Analyzer Out PWA Tab Periodic Waveform Analyzer Out PWA Tab The following table gives the overview of all app icons UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 95 4 1 User Interface Overview Table 4 3 Overview of app icons and short description Lock in Quick overview and access to all the settings and properties for signal generation and demodulation Lock in MF Quick overview and access to all the settings and properties for signal generation and demodulation Numeric Access to all continuously streamed measurement data as numerical values Plotter Displays various continuously streamed measurement data as traces over time roll mode Displays shots of data samples in time and frequency domain FFT representation Provides complex trigger functionality on all continuously streamed data samples and time domain display Provides FFT functionality to all continuously streamed measurement data Sweeper Allows to scan one variable of a wide choice e g frequency over a defined range and display various response functions including statistical operations AU Real time arithmetic operations on demodulator i outputs Controls all settin
208. ncy lorry tres Fryer Pry pe Pe Pao a a a oa oa a a a oa oa a or LLL Ls i Lin i SLL SLi i lining i i Li i i ivel 0 100 150 200 250 300 350 Amplitude pVs Phase deg Figure 3 40 AM envelope in Out PWA with 100 and 50 AM depth UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 91 Chapter 4 Functional Description LabOne User Interface This chapter gives a detailed description of all panels of the LabOne User Interface UI for the Zurich Instruments UHFLI LabOne provides a data server and a web server that allow to access and control the Instrument with any of the most common web browsers e g Firefox Chrome etc This architecture allows a platform independent interaction with the instrument by using various devices PC tablet smart phone etc even at the same time if needed On top of standard functionality like acquiring and saving data points this UI provides a wide variety of measurement tools for time and frequency domain analysis of measurement data as well as for convenient servo loop implementation and diagnosis UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 92 4 1 User Interface Overview 4 1 User Interface Overview 4 1 1 Ul Nomenclature This section provides an overview of the LabOne User Interface its main elements and naming conventions The LabOne User Interface is a browser based UI provided as the primary interface to the UHFLI Multiple browser sessions can access the instrument sim
209. nd the response curve is updated on the plot Only PID coefficients specified with the advise mode are optimized The Advise mode can be used incremental means current coefficients are used as starting point for the optimization unless other model parameters are changed in between numeric value PID coefficients used for calculation of the response of the PID model These parameters can be optimized with the PID advise or can be changed manually The parameters only get active on the PID after pressing the button to PID D Limit TC BW 3 dB numeric value The cutoff of the low pass filter for the D limitation shown as either the filter time constant or the 3 dB cutoff frequency depending on the selected TC mode When set to 0 the low pass filter is disabled Rate 109 9 kHz to 14 MHz PID sampling rate used for simulation The advisor will update the rate to match with the specified target bandwidth A sampling rate close UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 176 4 16 PID Tab Control Tool Option Range Description to the target bandwidth and excessive higher bandwidth will results in a simulation mismatch BW Hz numeric value Simulated bandwidth of the full close loop model with the current PID settings This value should be larger than the target bandwidth Target BW LED sreen red Green indicates that the target bandwidth can be fulfilled For very high PID bandwidth the target bandwidth might be only f
210. ne User Interface UHF pa ziControl di Documentation di LabOne Servers gt Firmware Upgrade UHF gt lt Labne Data Server UHF S4 LabOne Web Server UHF di Logs m settings 4 Back Mm Search programs ond files p Figure 1 8 Windows Start Menu The LabOne User Interface is an HIML5 browser based program This simply means that the user interface runs in a web browser and that a connection using a mobile device is also possible simply specify the IP address and port 8006 of the PC running the user interface Note The user interface requires a so called LabOne Web Server that runs in combination with the LabOne Data Server Instead of starting the user interface directly in your default browser as described above it s possible to start the LabOne Data Server UHF and LabOne Web Server UHF programs independently and then connect via a browser of your choice 1 Start the LabOne Data Server UHF and then the LabOne Web Server UHF program by selecting Start Menu gt Programs gt Zurich Instruments gt LabOne Servers gt LabOne Data Server UHF and Start Menu gt Programs gt Zurich Instruments gt LabOne servers gt LabOne Web Server UHF 2 In a web browser of your choice start the LabOne User Interface graphical user interface by entering the localhost address with port 8006 to connect to the LabOne Web Server ee a Oe Ue ks BOG Note Zurich Instruments supports the most recent versions of the most popul
211. ne XX Xx 00x Setup Custom Setup Li sre Select the way you want features to be installed 7 a N a a a Click the icons in the tree below to change the way features will be installed S E LabOne The complete package This feature requires OKB on your hard drive It has 4 of 5 subfeatures selected The subfeatures require 5738KB on your hard drive locaton C Program Fles zurich Instuments a et Ge Figure 1 3 Custom setup screen Click the Install button to start the installation process Windows will ask up to two times to reboot the computer Make sure you have no unsaved work on your computer Actually a reboot is practically never required so that one may safely press OK b The setup must update files or services that cannot be i updated while the system is running If you choose to continue a reboot will be required to complete the setup Figure 1 4 Installation reboot request Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 15 1 4 Software Installation m On Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7 it is required to confirm the installation of up to 2 drivers from the trusted publisher Zurich Instruments Click on Install 5 Windows Security Would you like to install this device software Name Zurich Instruments AG Universal Serial B IT Publisher Zurich Instruments AG Always trust software from Zurich Instruments Install AG You should only ins
212. ng and analyzing the test signal are shown in the following table Table 3 6 Settings generate the reference signal UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 61 3 2 Tutorial External Reference Tab Lock in Lock in Lock in Lock in Lock in Lock in Lock in oma 2 fo foo om 2 Ino p To quickly verify the signal we can reconnect the Signal Output 2 with Signal Input 2 and check the signal shape on the Scope using the following settings Lock in Table 3 7 Settings acquire the reference signal Scope reer meer ON cope I N scope o o UH Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s Signal Output Front Panel Signal Input Ref Trigger OO Aux Output 0000 Figure 3 5 External reference on Signal Input 2 The resulting scope trace should look similar as indicated in the following screen capture g Amplitude Ba 410p i amp E 0 000000000s i A 0 000000000s 0 5 p A f f f A A f A A f A f A f fy A fy i i i A i A A N ty N A N N A f i A N la A A A s f j LA f f l f A i l A i f Bi f f l f A fy i N j j j T i fy f f f gt 1 Ji f ionov tit tue fr sy Pugh j fi fb Py gd ASFA FFFS FSF yy PP PELF LPL ey gy ch ee ge 4 nn kit i 0 000V j i l j l OE o a a r E p AO0 000V f YF 4 T e Ue be us i Vy Vy J i l j f io a T f Ve vi Ve 4 Yt n E a E i i a E y ye
213. ng figure shows a typical result in the plotter for the frequency tracking immediately after itis turned on UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 64 3 2 Tutorial External Reference 3 2 4 UHF User Manual Fe Config x Aux x Lock in x Add Row x ce Signal Inputs Oscillators Demodulators Signal Outputs 7 Reference Frequencies 1 Input Low Pass Filters Data Transfer l Osio Input 1 100 Mode Frequency Hz Mode Osc HarmDemod Freq Hz Phase deg Signal Order BW 348 Sinc ER En Rate Savs ER Trigger Trig Mode Output 1 vo Ra 1 2 s0 1 ExtRef 30 0000000M 1 Demod i 1 29 9999999M 0 0000 Sigint 3 100 1 717k Continous On lms Range fiz Jz zl TE Scaling 1 viv 2 Manual 30 0000000M 2 Demod i 1 29 9999999M 0 0000 Sigint gt 37 100 g 77x Continous gt Range v JH ES Ac Bj soo o s 3 Demod 1 1 29 9999999M 0 0000 Sigin1 3 100 1717 Continous Offset 0 000 v 2058 100 EO T ee RE 4 ExtRef fji 1 30 0000000M 0 0000 E Trigger 1 1 299 g 1717 Continous Amp V 1 000 V Foo cular Input 2 100 Output 2 Range 1 5 BR 50 5 Demod 2 1 30 0000000M 0 0000 Sigin2 gt 3 100 E 717k Continous On SA Scaling 1 v ISa 6 Demod 27 1 30 0000000M 0 0000 E Sigin2 3x 100 1 71 Continous Range 15v JA ac Ejson Ry na 7 Demod 27 1 30 0000000M 0 0000 E Sigin2 3 10 B 17x Continous Offset 500 0m V Jo i 8 Demod 2 1 30
214. ng to the UHF Instrument The most straightforward Ethernet connection method is to rely on a LAN configuration to recognize the UHF Instrument By connecting the instrument in a LAN a dynamic IP address will be assigned like any other PC by the DHCP server In case of restricted networks the network administrator may be required to register the device on the network by means of the MAC address The MAC address is indicated on the back panel of the instrument The Zurich Instruments software LabOne Data Server will detect the device in the network by means of a multicast If the network configuration does not allow or does not support multicast or the host computer has other network cards installed it is necessary to use a static IP setup as described below The UHF Instrument is configured to accept the IP address from the DHCP server or to fall back into IP address 192 168 1 10 if it does not get the address from the DHCP server Requirements m Network supports multicast especially router Multicast Point to Point P2P When you have two LAN cards installed in your host computer one of which is used for network connectivity e g internet the other can be used for a direct connection to the UHF Instrument Notebooks can generally profit from wireless LAN for network connectivity It is important to note that if you set a static IP on your host computer you may lose the connection to the internet 1 Use one of the network cards and
215. noparkstrasse 1 8005 Zurich Switzerland declares that the product UHFLI Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSamples s fulfils the requirements of the European guidelines 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility 2006 95 EC Low Voltage The assessment was performed using the directives according to Table1 Table 1 Conformity table EN 61326 1 2006 Emissions for industrial environments immunity for industrial environments EN 55011 Group 1 class A and B the product was tested in typical configuration EN 61000 4 2 CD4kV AD 8 kV EN 61000 4 3 10 V m 80 AM 80 MHz 1 GHz 3 V m 80 AM 1 MHz 2 GHz a 1 kV line line 2 kV line earth 3 V 80 AM power line EN 61010 1 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use C Figure 1 CE Logo UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments VI Chapter 1 Getting Started Welcome to the world of Ultra high Frequency UHF This first chapter Supports you with the set up of your UHF Instrument and prepares for your first measurements This chapter comprises m Quick Start Guide for the impatient m Inspecting the package content and accessories m List of essential handling and safety instructions m Installing LabOne the UHF Instrument software on your host computer m Powering on the device and connecting the device to a host computer m Performing basic operation checks on the instrument m Handy list of troubleshooting gui
216. nstrument and then the user decides to run in static IP configuration Note Only IP v4 is currently supported There is no support for IP v6 Warning Changing the IP settings of your network adapters manually can interfere with its later use as it cannot be used anymore for network connectivity until it is set again for dynamic IP Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings 6 Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically 5 Use the following DNS server addresses Validate settings upon exit Pr Figure 1 19 Dynamic IP configuration Static IP 1 Connect the Ethernet port of the static IP configured network card to the 1GbE port on the back panel of the UHF Instrument 2 Modify the shortcut of the LabOne User Interface UHF and LabOne Data Server UHF in the Windows Start menu Right click and go to Properties then add the following command line argument to the Target field device ip 192 168 1 10 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 34 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument The LabOne User Interface UHF shortcut Target field should look like this C Program Files Zurich Instruments LabOne WebServer ziWebServer exe auto start l server port 8004
217. nual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 38 1 6 Upgrading the Lock In Amplifier Firmware 1 6 Upgrading the Lock In Amplifier Firmware The LabOne software consists of both software that runs on your PC and software that runs on the UHF Lock in Amplifier itself In order to distinguish between the two the later will be referred to as firmware for the rest of this document When upgrading to a new software release It s also necessary to upgrade the UHF firmware If the device firmware is out of date and needs an upgrade this is indicated in the Device and Settings Dialog of the LabOne user interface See the section called Device And Settings Dialog 1 6 1 Preparation In order to upgrade the UHF firmware you must first take the following steps 1 Download and install the appropriate version 82bit 64bit of the LabOne software on your PC Administrator rights are necessary for the software installation Please see Section 1 4 Software Installation 2 Either start the UHF Lock in Amplifier or ifthe UHF was already running switch off and restart the UHF Lock in Amplifier 3 Connect the UHF to the PC with the LabOne installation via USB cable 1 6 2 Starting the UHF Firmware Upgrade Utility The UHF Firmware Upgrade Utility is the program used to perform a UHF firmware upgrade it is a GUI Graphical User Interface included in the standard LabOne installation p Zurich Instruments LabOne API LabOne Data S4 LabOn
218. o the four auxiliary outputs on the Instrument front panel and the two auxiliary inputs on the Instrument back panel This tab is available in all UHF Instruments 4 11 1 Features m Monitor signal levels of auxiliary input connectors m Monitor signal levels of auxiliary output connectors m Auxiliary output signal sources Demodulators PIDs Boxcars AUs and manual setting m Define Offsets and Scaling for auxiliary output values Control auxiliary output range limitations 4 11 2 Description The auxiliary tab serves mainly as a monitor and control of the auxiliary inputs and outputs Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 35 App icon and short description Aux Controls all settings regarding the auxiliary inputs and auxiliary outputs The auxiliary tab see Figure 4 19 is divided into three sections The Aux Input section gives two graphical and two numerical monitors for the signal strength applied to the auxiliary inputs on the back panel In the middle of the tab the Aux Output section allows to associate any of the measured signal to one of the 4 auxiliary outputs on the Instrument front panel With the action buttons next to the Preoffset and Offset values the effective voltage on the auxiliary outputs can be automatically set to zero The analog outputs can be limited to a certain range in order to avoid damaging the parts connected to t
219. on Frequency numeric value Actual frequency at which the PWA operates based on set oscillator frequency and harmonic scaling factor Traffic light showing whether the number of samples acquired is evenly distributed over all bins Single acquisition of a PWA data set Commensurability grey red Mode Phase Time Measurement data can be interpreted in four different modes and displayed over either phase native time frequency FFT or harmonics of the Freq Domain FFT base frequency FFT Harmonics FFT Copy from range Copy From Range Reset the start and width value to show the full Reset 360 deg numeric value Defines the start of PWA range in time or phase numeric value Defines width of PWA range in time or phase Samples 1t62 47 Defines the number of samples acquired of each PWA data set 450 MSa s Overflow grey red Indicates whether the number of samples collected per bin or the amplitude exceeds the numerical limit Reduce number of samples and or change frequency Acq Time s numeric value Estimated time needed for recording of the specified number of samples Infinite Acq Time string The signal source of this unit Boxcar is not producing any data Once it is configured and Change PWA start and span according to plot range enabled this field will indicate the duration of a single measurement Progress O to 100 Show state of the PWA acquisition in percent Maximum numb
220. on Enabled m Jumbo Packet 9014 Bytes m large Send Offload IPv4 Enabled m Receive Side Scaling Enabled m Receive Side Scaling Queues 4 Queues m 1CP IP Offloading Options All Enabled The UHF instrument must have the UHF 10G option installed The option key will be supplied when the option is bought If not already installed on delivery a USB or 1GbE connection is needed to the device to program the UHF 10G option The programming can be performed with the LabOne User Interface in the device tab After option programming a device restart is needed If the device is enabled the UHF 10G option programmed and the hardware installed the link status can be checked in the Intel 10 Gigabit XF SR Server Adapter Properties window by opening the sub tab Link Speed The link status should be green at 10Gbps Full Duplex After UHF instrument restart the 10GbE interface should be available see the the section called Device And Settings Dialog Note If a 10GbE network card is enabled the multicast will be sent over that interface As a consequence other devices connected to the 1GbE network will not be visible anymore The access the device over 1GbE the 10GbE interface should be temporarily disabled UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments or 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument Note Once the device Is running the connectivity can be checked with the link flag visible in the network card configuration UHF User Ma
221. on the top of each tab row tab area inside of each tab provides the active sections plots control part of each tab tabs unit selections consisting of settings controls and measurement tools 4 1 2 Unique Set of Analysis Tools All Instruments feature a comprehensive tool set for time and frequency domain analysis for both incoming signals and demodulated signals The selection of app icons however is limited by the software options installed on a particular device The icons provided by the icon bar on the left side of the UI can be roughly divided into two categories settings and tools Settings related tabs are in direct connection of the instrument hardware allowing the user to control all the settings and instrument states Tools on the other side focus on the display and analysis of the gathered measurement data There is no strict distinction between settings and tools e g will the sweeper change certain demodulator settings while performing a frequency sweep Within the tools one can further discriminate between time domain and frequency domain analysis moreover a distinction between the analysis of fast input signals typical sampling rate of 1 8 GSa s and the measurement of orders of magnitude slower data typical sampling rate of lt 28 MSa s derived for instance from demodulator outputs and auxiliary Inputs Table 4 2 provides a brief classification of the tools Table 4 2 Tools for time domain and frequency domain a
222. ontrol panel gt System and Security gt System System type m Windows 8 Control panel gt System gt System System type Table 1 4 Find out the OS addressing architecture 32 bit or 64 bit GOU gt Control Panel System and Security System Search Control Pane GOU gt Control Panel System and Security System I Search Contro Pane Control Panel Home Control Panel Home View basic information about your computer View basic information about your computer Device Manager Windows edition Device Manager Windows edition Remote settings Windows 7 Enterprise N Remote settings Windows 7 Enterprise N amp System protection Copyright 2009 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved System protection Copyright 2009 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Advanced system settings Advanced system settings Syst aa System Rating System rating is not available Processor Intel R Core TM 2 CPU 6400 2 13GHz 2 13 GHz Installed memory RAM 1 00 GB System type 32 bit Operating System Rating System rating is not available Processor Intel R Core TM 2 CPU 6400 2 13GHz 2 13 GHz Installed memory RAM 1 00 GB System type 64 bit Operating System Pen and Touch No Pen or Touch Input is available for this Display ype as pana Pen and Touch No Pen or Touch Input is available for this Display Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name WIN HD
223. or the Math sub tab please see Table 4 7 in the section called Cursors and Math UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 150 4 10 Arithmetic Unit Tab 4 10 Arithmetic Unit Tab The Arithmetic Unit AU tab allows the user to define arithmetic operations that are performed on lock in demodulator outputs in real time The results of the AUs can be provided to physical connectors or to other internal units This functionality and tab is available in all UHF instruments 4 10 1 Features Four arithmetic units more than 50 input parameters m Add and subtract demodulator samples X Y R and Boxcar output samples m Multiply and divide demodulator samples X Y R and Boxcar output samples m Calculate polar coordinates from arbitrary Cartesian demodulator outputs m Fixed coefficients and auxiliary inputs as scaling factors m Results available on auxiliary outputs and with that they can also be used as demodulator inputs m Results available as PID input requires UHF PID option Streaming to host computer 4 10 2 Description The AU tab is the tool used to define and monitor mathematical operations on measurement data in real time Whenever unavailable pressing the following symbol will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 33 App icon and short description AU Real time arithmetic operations on demodulator There are four expandable sections see Figure 4 18 each corresponding to one ari
224. osses the trigger level from high to low For dual edge triggering select also the rising edge Defines the trigger level Selects absolute hysteresis 133 4 6 Scope Tab Hysteresis Selects a hysteresis relative to the adjusted full scale signal input range Hysteresis V trigger signal range Defines the voltage the source signal must positive values only deviate from the trigger level before the trigger is rearmed again Set to 0 to turn it off The sign is defined by the Edge setting Hysteresis numeric percentage Hysteresis relative to the adjusted full scale value positive signal input range A hysteresis value larger than values only 100 is allowed Show Level ON OFF If enabled shows the trigger level as grey line in the plot The hysteresis is indicated by a grey box The trigger level can be adjusted by drag and drop of the grey line If enabled the trigger will be gated by the trigger Trigger Gating ON OFF Enable gating input signal This feature requires the UHF DIG option Holdoff Mode Holdoff s Holdoff is defined as time Holdoff events Holdoff is defined as number of events Hol doff s numeric value Defines the time before the trigger is rearmed after a recording event Holdoff events 1 to 1048575 Defines the trigger event number that will trigger the next recording after a recording event A value one will start a recording for each trigger event Reference
225. pe Active and their logically inverse signals The Trigger Output signals are controlled on the DIO tab Section 4 13 Figure 4 13 shows an illustration of the signal that will be generated on the Trigger Output when one of the six new Scope related sources is selected An example input signalis shown at the top of the figure It is assumed that the Scope is configured to trigger on this input signal on a rising edge crossing the level indicated by the stippled line Trigger point Trigger level rrrrnrnr iio fi Input signal User activates scope Scope state de Active die Logic 1 Scope Trigger A er Scope Trigger y Scope Active Scope Active aaas Time Figure 4 13 Illustration of the signal that will appear on the Trigger Output when one of the six Scope related sources is selected The Scope can be thought of as having a state which changes over time The state is shown below the input signal in the figure When the Scope is completely inactive it is said to be in the Idle UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 130 4 6 Scope Tab 4 6 3 state When the user then activates the Scope It will transition into a Buffer state In this state the scope will start to record the input signal It will remain inthis state until sufficient data has been recorded to fulfill the user requirement for recording data prior to the trigger point as controlled by the trigger Reference and Delay fields i
226. pment it is highly recommended to make use of the center value and the upper and lower limit values as this will guarantee the output to be in the defined range even when the lock fails and the integrator goes into saturation 4 16 3 Functional Elements Table 4 46 PID tab ON OFF Enable the PID controller Demodulator X Inout source of PID controller Demodulator Y UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments ITS 4 16 PID Tab Demodulator R ator R AuxInput AuxInput AuxOutput AuxOutput_ Input Channel Select input channel of PID controller Setpoint PID controller setpoint TC Mode ON OFF Enables time constant representation of PID parameters Phase Unwrap ON OFF Enables the phase error unwrapping up to F F 320i Output Sig Out 1 2 Feed back to the main signal output amplitudes Amplitude Osc Frequency Feed back to any of the internal oscillator frequencies Demodulator Phase Feed back to any of the 8 demodulator phase set points Aux Output Offset Feed back to any of the 4 Auxiliary Outputs Offset Signal Output Offset Feed back to the main Signal Output offset adjustment Output Channel index Sel ect output channel of PID controll Center Upper Lower numeric value After adding the Center value to the PID output Limit the signal is clamped to Center Lower Limit and Center Upper Limit numeric value PID Output indicator defined as out P Error l Int Error dt D dErro
227. put data sent to PC This value defines the applied decimation for sending data to the PC It does not affect the Aux Output Decimation Integer value Decimation factor applied to ensure a sampling ideally O rate smaller than the Max Rate set Copy the current PID settings to the PID Advisor Lsel Advanced ON OFF Enables manual selection of display and advice properties If disabled the display and advise settings are automatically with optimized default values lay Displa Bode Magnitude _ Display the Bode magnitude plot Bode Phase Display the Bode phase plot step Resp Display the step response plot Start Hz numeric value Start frequency for Bode plot display For disabled advanced mode the start value is automatically derived from the system properties and the input field is read only Stop Hz numeric value Stop frequency for Bode plot display For disabled advanced mode the stop value is automatically derived from the system properties and the input field is read only Start s numeric value Start time for step response display For disabled advanced mode the start value is zero and the field is read only Stop s numeric value Stop time for step response display For disabled advanced mode the stop value is automatically derived from the system properties and the input field is read only DUT Output Start point is at the DUT output and instrument input Response Out PID Output End point is at PID ou
228. quency domain The Trigger sub tab offers all the controls necessary for triggering on different signal sources When the trigger is enabled then oscilloscope shots are only acquired when the trigger conditions are met Trigger and Hysteresis levels can be indicated graphically in the plot A disabled trigger is equivalent to continuous oscilloscope shot acquisition Digitizer upgrade option The UHF DIG Digitizer option greatly enhances the performance of the Scope with the addition of the following features m Simultaneous recording of two Scope channels m Memory depth of 128 MSa for both Scope channels m Additional input signal sources Boxcar Demodulator Arithmetic Unit and PID data rigger gating Additional trigger input sources that allow for cross domain triggering m Additional trigger output sources based on the state of the Scope m Segmented data recording m Continuous scope data streaming Plotter tool This additional functionality can be enabled on any UHF device by uploading an option key Please contact Zurich Instruments to get more information The following sections explain the Digitizer features in more detail Two channels and extended memory depth With the UHF DIG option enabled it is possible to record two channels simultaneously The two channels are sampled atthe same time This allows for very exact time difference measurements Each channel can be assigned a different signal source Enabled triggering
229. r dt D Limit TC BW 3 dB 102 ns to The cutoff of the low pass filter for the D 2335 1S 0625 HZ limitation shown as either the filter time to 1 56 MHz constant or the 3 dB cutoff frequency depending on the selected TC mode When set to 0 the low pass filter is disabled 109 9 kHz to 14 MHz PID sampling rate and update rate of PID outputs Rate Needs to be set substantially higher than the targeted loop filter bandwidth Note The numerical precision of the controller is influenced by the loop filter sampling rate If the target bandwidth is below 1 kHz is starts to make sense to adjust this rate to a value of about 100 to 500 times the target bandwidth If the rate is set to high for low bandwidth applications integration inaccuracies can lead to non linear behavior Error Error Set point PID Input Shift numeric value Difference between the current output value Out and the Center Out numericvalue Current output value UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 174 4 16 PID Tab Tune Optimize the PID parameters so that the noise of the closed loop system gets minimized The tuning method needs a proper starting point for optimization away from the limits The tuning process can be interrupted and restarted The tuning will try to match the PID bandwidth with the loop bandwidth of the DUT signal input demodulator and signal output Max Rate Sa s 1 to 14 MSa s Target Rate for PID out
230. r is output from an Instrument after analysis is associated with a loss of SNR e g by the Instruments inputs noise Multiple such steps can deteriorate signal quality significantly All these shortcomings are nicely overcome by providing the ability to generate linear combinations of oscillator frequencies and base demodulation on that To do so the MOD option provides two sections MOD 1 and MOD 2 Both are identical in all aspects other than the fact that MOD 1 is hard wired to demodulators 1 2 and 3 whereas MOD 2 has a permanent assignment to demodulators 5 6 and 7 Each of them can make use of up to 3 independent numerical oscillators which can be even referenced to an external source by using ExtRef or a PLL on demodulators 4 and 8 respectively Figure 4 30 gives an overview of the different components involved and their interconnections MOD Option Harmonic Oscillator Number x n2 NCO 2 Sideband 1 Frequency f2 Demod 2 6 n1 f1 n2 f2 o f QENI OON Signal NCO 1 Carri 2 Output 1 1 Carrier ae Demod 1 5 Oscillator Number A Frequency f1 SEIN n1ef1tn36f3 Demod 3 7 Signal Output 2 NCO 3 Sideband 2 KEIN Oscillator Number Frequency f3 Figure 4 30 Modulation Option block diagram For convenience the UI provides access to presets for AM and FM in the Mode column In the Manual Mode all settings can be chosen freely When there is more than three frequencies present on a single signal one can eve
231. r of the PID input data is high enough to fully resolved the behavior in the time domain Auto tune The auto tune feature can now help to fully optimize on the residual noise performance of the error signal The implemented simplex algorithm will vary the parameters as selected in the Advise Mode field in the PID advisor section in order to minimize the root mean square of the PID error signal That is often accompanied by a lowering of the effective servo loop bandwidth and works great as long as there are no occasional large disruptions entering the loop A typical example where the use of the auto tune feature makes no sense are situations where the loop serves to follow a step change of a certain parameter e g the setpoint that needs to be accommodated within a required time interval The transfer function of the PID settings chosen can always be checked by copying the values to the Advisor pressing the To Advisor button and selecting the Advanced Mode With the Response In set to Setpoint the Response Out set to PID Output and with Closed Loop not activated one can visualize the Bode Magnitude of the PID controllers transfer function This graph is what is usually given in textbooks and entirely independent of the model function chosen in the DUT section However in order to simulate step responses or to calculate a bandwidth a suitable model for the entire loop is required If one is only interested in the PID bandwidth one can chose the Al
232. raphical and numerical range indicators m Polar and Cartesian formats Support for Input Scaling and Input Units 4 4 2 Description The numeric tab serves as the main numeric overview display of multiple measurement data The display can be configured by both choosing the values displayed and also arrange the display tiles at will Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 14 ai icon and short description Numeric Access to all continuously streamed measurement data as numerical values The numeric tab see Figure 4 8 is divided into a display section on the left and a settings section which is again subdivided into a number of sub tabs Scope x Numeric x AddRow x Demodulator 1 x Demodulator 1 x Demodulator 2 x Demodulator 2 x Presets Tree Settings R Phase R Phase 35 28145 mV 3 73483 deg 9 89982 uV 99 16781 deg Selecta Preset A e Mre CEE E 35 280 35 285 35 290 3 740 3 738 3 736 9 10 11 12 13 98 96 94 92 Demods Cartesian Enabled Demods Cartesian mv deg HV deg Demods R reed Demodulator 3 x Demodulator 3 x Demodulator 4 x Demodulator 4 x PID Erro R Phase R Phase Arihmetie Units B 23 36752 uV 160 74044 deg 35 28145 mV 3 73483 deg 24 25 26 163 162 161 160 159 158 35 280 35 285 35 290 3 740 3 738 3 736 uV deg mV deg Demodulator 5 x Demodulator 5 x Phase 0 71513 pV 7 58998 deg Cor 0 4 0 6 0 8 20 10 0 uV deg
233. re trigger This allows for triggering on Scope armed scope triggered and scope active signals Demod 4 Phase __ Trigger on O degree oscillator phase crossing on demodulator 4 Demod 8 Phase _ Trigger on O degree oscillator phase crossing on demodulator 8 Bits Oto 2 32 1 Specify the value of the DIO to trigger on All specified bits have to be setin order to trigger This field is only displayed for trigger type Digital Bit Mask 0 to 2 32 1 Specify a bit mask for the DIO trigger value The trigger value is bits AND bit mask bitwise This field is only displayed for trigger type Digital full signalrange Specify the trigger level value Find Find Automatically find the trigger level based on the Hysteresis full signalrange The hysteresis is important to trigger on the correct edge in the presence of noise The hysteresis is applied below the trigger level for positive trigger edge selection It is applied above for negative trigger edge selection and on both sides for triggering on both edges Count integer number Number of trigger events to record in Single mode Trigger progress 0 to 100 The percentage of triggers already acquired in Single mode Bandwidth Hz O10 0 5 Bandwidth of the low pass filter applied to the Sampling Rate trigger signal For edge and pulse trigger use a bandwidth larger than the signal sampling rate divided by 20 to keep the phase delay For tracking filter use a bandwidth
234. requency For example typing 1 k in the Rate field will result in 1 7 kSa s which is sufficient to not only properly resolve the signal but also to avoid aliasing effects Figure 3 3 shows data samples displayed for the two demodulators with different filter settings described above 0 17685 o 0 17680 0 0000s H A 0 0000s Amplitude V 0 17675 0 17670 f N INL V IS aN HAAN A 0 17665 0 17660 f 0 0000000V 0 17655 amp Ty A 0 0000000v Figure 3 3 LabOne User Interface Plotter Demodulator 1 TC 9 3 ms blue Demodulator 2 TC 1 ms green Moreover you may for instance disturb the demodulator with a change of test signal amplitude for example from 0 5 V to 0 7 V and vice versa The green plot will go out of the display range which can be re adjusted by pressing the Auto Scale button With a large time constant the demodulated data change slower in reaction to the change in the input signal compared to a low time constant In addition the number of stable significant digits in the Numerical tool will also be higher with a high time constant UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 60 3 2 Tutorial External Reference 3 2 Tutorial External Reference 322 1 3 2 2 Note This tutorial is applicable to all UHF Instruments No specific options are required N B if the UHF MF multi frequency option is installed then some of the required settings will vary from those ind
235. required SSS 447 Next Calibration MAC 1GbE Ase 31 Dec 2013 80 2F DE 00 00 01 the Next Calibration sticker on the MAC address sticker on the the back panel of your instrument back panel of your instrument The UHF Instrument is equipped with a multi mains switched power supply and therefore can be connected to most power systems in the world The fuse holder is integrated with the power inlet and can be extracted by grabbing the holder with two finger nails or small screwdrivers at the top and at the bottom at the same time A spare fuse is contained in the fuse holder The fuse description is mentioned in the specification chapter Carefully inspect your Instrument If there is mechanical damage or the amplifier does not pass the basic tests then you should immediately notify the Zurich Instruments support team at lt support zhinst com gt UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 10 1 3 Handling and Safety Instructions 1 3 Handling and Safety Instructions The UHFLI is a sensitive electronic instrument which under no circumstances should be opened as there are high voltage parts inside which may be harmful to human beings Moreover there are no serviceable parts inside the instrument Opening the instrument immediately cancels the warranty provided by Zurich Instruments The following general safety instructions must be observed during all phases of operation service and
236. rt description Out PWA Multi channel boxcar settings and measurement analysis for boxcar outputs Sa The Out PWA tab see Figure 4 34 consists of a plot and a control tab on the right hand side Config x Device xX Aux X Lock in Xx OutPWA x AddRow x 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 Settings Math 2 Output PWA 1 Wavefo Signal Input Input Signal Boxcar 2 Waveform V Osc Select 1 Frequency HZ 0 00000000 AN uw Horizontal Mode Phase v Copy From Range Start Phase deg 0 000 Width deg 360 000 Samples 33 5544M D Ov E Acq Time s Will never finish Dy g Vertical Signal Waveform 350 Phase deg Figure 4 34 LabOne UI Out PWA tab Note The Out PWA works exactly the same way as the PWA supplied in the Boxcar tabs see Figure 4 33 except that its inputs are limited to the output of the two Boxcar units It is important to understand that the Boxcar results are directly connected to the input of the Out PWA in particular that there is now averaging or down sampling applied in between UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 194 4 20 Out PWA Tab 4 20 3 Functional Elements Table 4 55 Out PWA tab Settings sub tab Control Tool Option Range Description Run Stop Continuously run and stop PWA acquisition Input Signal Boxcar 1 Select PWA input signal Boxcar 2 Osc Select oscillator index Select reference oscillator for PWA signal acquisiti
237. s OF SMS whatever is larger The UHF Instrument permits to input external references and triggers on the same connectors At the same time it is possible to output triggers and synchronization signals partially on the same connectors For this purpose 2 bidirectional 2 output and 2 input connectors are provided Note Table 5 8 Demodulators eS es aes demodulator number demodulator harmonic setting range ee a o 1023 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 202 5 2 Analog Interface Specifications demodulator filter time constant demodulator measurement bandwidth demodulator filter slope roll off Gy 12 1 Oy 2400 00 42 48 dB oct consisting of up to 8 cascaded critical damping filters demodulator output resolution Rm X Y R O with 64 bit resolution rate readout rate for detailed Vee ee aioe specifications refer to Table 5 4 ee p 400 kSa s 1GbE 1 Gbit s LAN o 1 6 MS s 10GbE 10 Gbit s 3 2 MS s LAN demodulator harmonic rejection Tlo dBc pe fe group delay lag time from Signal Input 30 ns time constant 3 Us to Aux Output and 1st order filter Table 5 9 Auxiliary Inputs and Outputs auxiliary output connectors baronon ome mesne soo amplitude fov _ ov resolution OSV rivecurrent om bandwidth moedas J ampie aov Table 5 10 Oscillator and clocks internal clock ovenized crystal initialaccuracy 0 5 ppm long term
238. s evenly distributed over all bins Input Signal Signal Inputs Select PWA input signal Ref Trigger Auxiliary Inputs Auxiliary Outputs Input Interlock ON OFF Interlock PWA and Boxcar Input settings Mode Measurement data can be interpreted in four different modes and displayed over either phase native time frequency FFT or harmonics of the Freq Domain FFT base frequency FFT Harmonics FFT FFT Copy from range Copy From Range Copy From Range Range ae PWA start and span according to plo range Reset Reset the start and width value to show the full 360 deg Defines the start of PWA range in time or phase Width Defines width of PWA range in time or phase 1 to 2 47 Defines the number of samples acquired of each PWA data set 450 MSa s UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 190 4 19 Boxcar Tab Overflow grey red Indicates whether the number of samples collected per bin or the amplitude exceeds the numerical limit Reduce number of samples and or change frequency Acq Time s numeric value Estimated time needed for recording of the specified number of samples Infinite Acq Time string The signal source of this unit Boxcar is not producing any data Once it is configured and enabled this field will indicate the duration of a single measurement FFT resolution bin width in Hz Signal Waveform Select signal to be displayed Table 4 53 Boxcar tab Bo
239. s in the same box Triple harmonic mode simultaneous measurement at three harmonic frequencies m Arbitrary frequency mode optional simultaneous measurement at six arbitrary frequencies Ultra high frequency Signal Inputs m 72 low noise UHF inputs single ended 600 MHz bandwidth m Variable input range m Switchable input impedance m Selectable AC DC coupling Ultra high frequency Signal Outputs 72 low distortion UHF outputs single ended 600 MHz bandwidth m Variable output range Demodulators amp Reference m Upto 8 dual phase demodulators m Upto 8 programmable numerical oscillators m Upto 2 external reference signals m Upto4input and up to 4 output trigger signals m Individually programmable demodulator filters m 128 bit internal processing m 64 bit resolution demodulator sample m 48 bit internal reference resolution Auxiliary Input and Outputs 4 auxiliary outputs user defined signals m 72 auxiliary inputs general purpose High speed Connectivity m USB 2 0 high speed 480 Mbit s host interface m LAN 1 Gbit s controller interface m DIO 32 bit digital input output port Ctrl 2 ports peripheral control m Clock input connector 10 MHz m Clock output connector 10 MHz Extensive Time and Frequency Domain Analysis Tools m Numeric tool m Oscilloscope m Frequency response analyzer m FFI spectrum analyzer ZOOMFFI spectrum analyzer UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 47
240. s of the user interface have been updated providing a considerable increase of usability The functional description chapter is still small The user manual will be obverhauled with much more infomation with the next release Revision 17290 23 May 2013 Updated the connecting to the UHFLI section in the getting started chapter to reflect software usability improvements in software release 13 02 Revision 15874 11 Feb 2013 Updated the getting started chapter with more detailed information on setup and several screenshots Other minor edits in the whole document Revision 15785 1 Feb 2013 This is the first version of the UHFLI user manual related to software release 13 01 The main available sections are the getting started the functional overview a first tutorial of the user interface and the specifications Other sections will follow Table of Contents DEC laTatOn Cl CON Ory 25 cei tect bee r A E ste okie See echt alec nuanced iad ana cea VI RE aE EES E o EE E A E E E A AAE E 7 Tet OUCK OIE OWOG secen a a a a a a A ete heed 8 tappet tne Packace Contents maitera oriei a ea a E 9 kocHandine and oaio INSU CUON meaai fats nin A urdeg anced T1 TA SS E eE AION E E E T3 To CONMeGtINS tO THS WAI INS TUMONAT aaien a i Seana 19 1 6 Upgrading the Lo k In Amplifier Firmware Sascwnhihsaisstedasdcecpestuiedcdanseseeid eed decaneaness 39 TA OUI LOS OOS erpai e acs tet tal E ill eect ccd hed hcla neta 42 A UCU Ola OVEIVICWE aerie a ag
241. s recommended to rerun the self threshold calibration A LED indicator in the status bar indicates when another self calibration is recommended Next calibration time in seconds Remaining seconds until the first calibration is executed or arecalibration is requested Manual self Run Initiate self calibration to improve input digitizer calibration linearity Interface USB 1GbE 10GbE Active interface between device and PC used by the server In case multiple options are available the following order of priority is used 1 USB 2 100E 3 TOGBE UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 167 4 15 Device Tab Current IP address of the device This IP address is assigned dynamically by a DHCP server defined statically or is a fall back IP address if the DHCP server could not be found for point to IP4 Address default 192 168 001 010 point connections Jumbo Frames ON OFF Enable jumbo frames for this device and interface as default Static IP ON OFF Enable this flag if the device is used in a network with fixed IP assignment without a DHCP server IP4 Address default Static IP address to be written to the device 192 168 001 010 IP4 Mask default Static IP mask to be written to the device 295 285 255 000 Gateway default Static IP gateway 192 168 001 001 Program Click to program the specified IP4 address IP4 Mask and Gateway to the device Pending integer value Number of buffers ready for receiving comm
242. s used as the device under test To perform this tutorial one simply needs to connect a resonator between Signal Output 2 to Signal Input 2 Preparation Connect the cables as illustrated below Make sure the UHFLI is powered on and then connect the UHFLI through the USB to your PC or to your local area network LAN where the host computer resides After starting LabOne the default web browser opens with the LabOne graphical user interface U H Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Aux Output 6860 Front Panel Resonator Figure 3 20 PID connection with UHF The tutorial can be started with the default instrument configuration e g after a power cycle and the default user interface settings e g as is after pressing F5 in the browser Automatic Gain Control In this section you will learn how to control the output amplitude of your device under test In theory you can control the amplitude of any devices connected in the feedback configuration through a PID In this case we will use a resonator driven at its resonance frequency by one of two UHFLI signal generators and then measured with one of two lock in channels If you are continuing the PLL tutorial then we can just leave the PLL enabled Otherwise you should know how to generate an excitation signal at the modulation that you require and then measure the signal amplitude that you want to control The device under test
243. se locked loops m Low pass filter for derivative branch 4 16 2 Description The PID tab is the main control center of general servo loop related settings Whenever closed or a new instance is needed the following symbol pressed will generate a new instance of the tab Table 4 44 App icon and short description Features all control and analysis capabilities of the PID controllers UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 169 4 16 PID Tab The PID tab see Figure 4 25 is divided into four identical sub tabs each of them providing access to the settings functionality for one of the four PID controllers and the related PID Advisor Config x Device xX Aux xX Lock in x PID x AddRow x 1 Ppa PID Advisor 107 10 10 10 10 Enable Advanced Mode 2 3 4 Amplitude dBV Input DemodR v iv Display Bode Magnitu v Setpoint V 50 00m Start Hz 818 4u 1 F X2 1 0000 fHz TC Mode Stop Hz 81 84 A 0 0000 1z Phase Unwrap Response In Setpoint Response Out PID Error v 2 Output OutputlAmy 4 Closed Loop g Center V 100 0m Lower Limit V 500 0m Advisor 3h Upper Limit V 500 0m Target BW Hz 10 00k Advise Mode Pl 7 PID Settings PID A P 1 000 P 1 000 ER I 1S 10 00 I Us 10 00 ca D s 1 000m D s 0 000 D Limit BW 3dB 0 000 D Limit BW 3dB 0 000 5 Rate Hz 14 06M Rate Hz 0 000 Error V 3 565u BW Hz 818 4m Shift V 41 75m PM deg 133 6 e 6 Out V 141 7m Tune
244. se settings is a slightly increased power consumption UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 8 1 2 Inspect the Package Contents 1 2 Inspect the Package Contents If the shipping container appears to be damaged keep the container until you have inspected the contents of the shipment and have performed basic functional tests Please verity You have received 1 Zurich Instruments UHF Instrument You have received 1 power cord with a power plug suited to your country You have received 1 USB cable and or 1 LAN cable category 5 6 required A printed version of the Getting Started section The Next Calibration sticker on the rear panel of the Instrument indicates approximately 2 years ahead in time Zurich Instruments recommends calibration intervals of 2 years The MAC address of the instrument is displayed on a sticker on the back panel Table 1 1 Package contents for the UHF Instrument Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s ON 1474 N sen f N Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Aux Output 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 4 a B 500 In 500 2 5V 1kQ 5V 500 10V 8dBm Out 500 3 3V TTL 500 1MQ max 3 5V Zurich Instruments the USB cable the power cord e g EU norm UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 9 1 2 Inspect the Package Contents the power inlet with power switch and fuse holder the LAN Ethernet cable category 5 6
245. set it to static IP in TCP IPv4 using the following IP address and mask goto Control Panel gt Internet Options gt Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center Local Area Connection Properties Note that the IP address of the PC should be 192 168 1 n where n 2 9 and the mask should be 255 255 255 0 The device itself will use the fall back address 192 168 1 10 if it doesn t get the address Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 19 168 Subnet mask 255 255 255 Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server E Validate settings upon exit aaa Figure 1 18 Static IP configuration Requirements UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 33 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument w networks cards needed for additional connection to internet m Network adapter NIC of PC supports multicast m Network adapter connected to the device must be in static IP4 configuration Note A power cycle of the UHF Instrument is required if it was previously connected to a network that provided a IP address to the i
246. setup The effective wait time is the maximum of this value and the demodulator filter settling time determined from the Inaccuracy value specified Inaccuracy numeric value Demodulator filter settling inaccuracy defining the wait time between a sweep parameter change and recording of the next sweep point Typical inaccuracy values 10m for highest sweep speed for large signals 100u for precise amplitude measurements 100n for precise noise measurements Depending on the order the settling accuracy will define the number of filter time constants the sweeper has to wait The maximum between this value and the settling time is taken as wait time until the next sweep point is recorded Settling Time TC numeric valu Calculated wait time expressed in time constants defined by the specified filter settling inaccuracy Algorithm alculates the average on each data set Standard Deviation culates the standard deviation on each data Average Power Calculates the electric power based ona 50 Q input impedance integer number Count Sa Sets the number of data samples per sweeper parameter point that is considered in the measurement The maximum between this value and the next setting is taken as effective calculation time Count TC 0 5 15 50 TC Sets the effective measurement time per sweeper parameter point that is considered in the measurement The maximum between this value and the previous setting is taken as effective calculation
247. sion Control Protocol Internet Protocol An independent sequence of instructions to be executed by a processor Measure of the non linearity of signal channels input and output Transistor to Transistor Logic level Ultra High Frequency Ultra High Stability Universal Serial Bus Voltage Controlled Oscillator Instrument that measures the network parameters of electrical networks commonly expressed as s parameters For this purpose it measures the voltage of an input signal providing both amplitude gain and phase information For this characteristic an older name was gain phase meter see Also Gain Phase Meter Scalar Network Analyzer Extensible Markup Language Markup language that defines a set of rules for encoding documents in a format that is both human readable and machine readable Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 217 Z ZCtrl Zurich Instruments Control bus ZOOMFFT This technique performs FFI processing on demodulated samples for instance after a lock in amplifier Since the resolution of an FFT depends on the number of point acquired and the spanned time not the sample rate it is possible to obtain very highly resolution spectral analysis ZSYNC Zurich Instruments Synchronization bus UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 218 Index Symbols VOGDE Back panel 51 1GbE Back panel 51 A AM demodulation Tutorial 70 Amplitude modulation Tutorial 68 Arithmetic Unit Tab 151 Automatic G
248. sly LabOne User Interface clients and or API clients and also by several users accessing the same device from different computers All clients access the instrument by means of the LabOne Data Server UHF program a dedicated server that is in charge of all communication to and from the device LabOne Software Architecture This section gives a brief overview on the software architecture of the LabOne software package This will help to better understand the following chapters The software of Zurich Instruments lock in amplifiers is server based This allows for multiple clients to access devices with synchronized settings The Zurich Instruments LabOne software is organized in layers LabOne Software Layers An overview of the software layers is shown in Figure 1 7 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 19 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument Matlab Python LabView Application Layer ziDAQ API gt lt ipython API p lt API API Layer DLL oO O O O A O TCP 8006 Web Server Layer TCP 8004 TCP 8004 TCP 8004 Data Server Layer oO 9P qes oO O m m O ae eee TA ee due ec OO eee atc ee eee E EEO E E ee a ee ee ee ee ee ENE ENEA ENEE gt a mi O Q D D4 Device 1 pe Device 2 4 Device 3 Devices Figure 1 7 Software architecture Each device is internally controlled by firmware FW If a software release offers new device functionality the device firmware may need an
249. smaller than signal sampling frequency divided by 100 to just track slow signal components like drifts ON OFF Enable low pass filtering of the trigger signal UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 138 4 7 Software Trigger Tab Hold Off Time positive Hold off time before the trigger is rearmed A hold numeric value off time smaller than the duration will lead to overlapping trigger frames Hold Off Count integer value Number of skipped triggers until the next trigger is recorded again Delay 2sto2s Time delay of trigger frame position left side relative to the trigger edge For delays smaller than O trigger edge inside trigger frame pre trigger For delays greater than O trigger edge before trigger frame post trigger Recording length for each triggered dataset Table 4 26 SW Trigger tab History sub tab History History Each entry in the list corresponds to a single trigger trace In the history The number of triggers displayed in the plot is limited to 20 Use the toggle buttons to hide display individual traces Use the color picker to change the color of a trace in the plot Double click on an entry to edit its name Clear All Remove all records from the history list Select all records from the history list Deselect all records from the history list Length integer value Maximum number of entries stored in the measurement history The number of entries displayed in the list is limited to t
250. so choose to apply an FFT to the polar demodulator values R and Theta This allows to carefully discriminate between phase noise components and amplitude noise components present in the signal As these samples are real numbers the spectrum is single sided with minimum frequency of 0 Hz The last option in the drop down list dO dt allows to apply the FFT onto samples of demodulator frequencies That is particularly useful when either the PLL or the ExtRef functionalities are used The FFT of the frequency samples then provide a quantitative view of what frequency noise components are present in the reference signal and also allows to infer which bandwidth might be suited best to track the signal 4 8 3 Functional Elements Table 4 28 Spectrum tab Settings sub tab Run Stop Run Stop Run the FFT spectrum analysis continuously le Run the FFT spectrum analysis once Demodulator demodulator index Select the inout demodulator for FFT soectrum analysis FFT X 1Y Complex FFT of the demodulator result zoom FFT The center frequency is defined by the oscillator frequency of the demodulator The span is twice the demodulator sampling rate FFT of the demodulator amplitude result sqrt x y The FFT is single sided as performed on real data UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 141 4 8 Spectrum Analyzer Tab FFT O FFT of the demodulator phase result atan2 y x The FFT is single sided as performed on real data PFI FF
251. so that the frequency shift is Zero Upper Limit Hz numeric value Upper frequency limit of the PLL oscillator The PLL frequency is clamped between Center Lower Limit and Center UpperLimit Lower Limit Hz numeric value Lower frequency limit of the PLL oscillator The PLL frequency is clamped between Center Lower Limit and Center UpperLimit Demodulator demodulator index Select the demodulator that is used as the phase detector of the PLL Demod BW Hz numeric valu Filter bandwidth of the input demodulator advanced mode Setpoint deg numeric value Phase set point in degrees i e PID setpoint Control the phase difference between the input signal and the generated signal P Hz deg PLL proportional gain P Hz deg PLL integral gain D Hz deg s PLL differential gain D D Limit TC numeric value Time constant of the low pass filter for the D limitation When O the low pass filter is disabled Rate Hz numeric value Current sampling rate of the PLL control loop Note The numerical precision of the controller is influenced by the loop filter sampling rate If the target bandwidth is below 1 kHz is starts to make sense to adjust this rate to a value of about 100 to 500 times the target bandwidth If the rate is set to high for low bandwidth applications integration inaccuracies can lead to non linear behavior Current phase error of the PLL Set Point PID Input PLL lock LED grey green Indicates when the PLL is
252. strument and referred to the signal input thus expressed as additional source of noise for the measured signal Internet Protocol Local Area Network Light Emitting Diode Instrument suited for the acquisition of small signals in noisy environments or quickly changing signal with good signal to noise ratio lock in amplifiers recover the signal of interest knowing the frequency of the signal by demodulation with the suited reference frequency the result of the demodulation are amplitude and phase of the signal compared to the reference these are value pairs in the complex plane X Y R Refers to the unique identifier assigned to network adapters for physical network communication Refers to the simultaneous measurement of signals modulated at arbitrary frequencies The objective of multi frequency is to increase the information that can be derived from a measurement which is particularly important for one time non repeating events and to increase the speed of a measurement since different frequencies do not have to be applied one after the other see Also Multi harmonic Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments PAES Multi harmonic MH N Noise Equivalent Power Bandwidth NEPBW Nyquist Frequency NF O Output Amplitude Accuracy OAA OV P PC PD Phase locked Loop PLL Phase modulation AFM PM AFM PID PE R RISC Root Mean Square RMS UHF User Manual Refers to the simultaneous me
253. t amplitude measured over about 100 ms scaling inactive scaling of the input signal with an arbitrary factor throughout the graphical user interface This field can be used for unit conversions e g from mV to V Measurement Unit unit acronym Defines the measurement unit of the input UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 114 4 3 Lock in MF Tab The value in this field modifies the readout of all measurement tools in the user interface Typical uses of this field is to make measurements in the unit before the sensor transducer e g to take an transimpedance amplifier into account and to directly read results in Ampere instead of Volts ON AC coupling AC coupl ON AC coupling Defines the input coupling for the Signal Inputs OFF DC coupling AC coupling inserts a high pass filter ON OO ON 50Q Sets the matching impedance for the signal OFF 1 MO ee ito Mode The user setting defines the oscillator frequency PLL The UHF PID option controls the oscillator frequency The UHF PID option controls the oscillator frequency ExtRef An external reference is mapped onto the oscillator frequency Frequency Hz O to 600 MHz Frequency control for each oscillator Locked ON OFF Oscillator locked to external reference when turned on Mode Demod Default operating mode with demodulator used for lock in demodulation ExtRef The demodulator is used for external reference mode and tracks the frequency of the s
254. t with the supplied USB cable to the PC on which the LabOne Software is installed The USB driver needed for controlling the device is included in the LabOne Installer package Ensure that the device uses the latest firmware The software will automatically use the USB interface for controlling the device if available If the USB connection is not available the Ethernet connection may be selected It is possible to enforce or exclude a specific interface connection Note To use the device exclusively over the USB interface modify the shortcut of the LabOne User Interface UHF and LabOne Data Server UHF in the Windows Start menu Right click and go to Properties then add the following command line argument to the Target LabOne User Interface UHF interface usb true interface ip false Device Discovery USB Devices connected over USB can be automatically connected by the Data Server as there is only a single host PC to which the device interface is physically connected auto connect on This is the default behavior Ifa device is attached viaa USBcable aconnection willbe established automatically auto connect off To disable automatic connection via USB add the following command line argument when starting the Data Server auto connect off This is achieved by right clicking the LabOne Data Server shortcut in the Start menu selecting Properties and adding the text to the Target field as shown in Figure 1 17 UHF User Manual
255. tall driver software from publishers you trust How can I decide which device software is safe to install Figure 1 5 Installation driver acceptance m Click OK on the following pretty obvious notification i Zurich Instruments LabOne XX XxX XXXXx Setup Fh Please attach your device to this computer any time after the installation has finished Figure 1 6 Installation completion screen 3 Click Finish to close the Zurich Instruments LabOne installer Warning Do not install drivers from another source and therefore not trusted as originated from Zurich Instruments 1 4 2 Linux Installation Requirements Please ensure that the following requirements are fulfilled before trying to install the LabOne software package 1 Officially only Ubuntu 12 04 LTS i386 amd64 is supported although in practice the LabOne package may work on other platforms Please ensure that you are using a Linux distribution that is compatible with Ubuntu Debian but preferably Ubuntu 12 04 LTS 2 You have administrator rights for the system 3 The correct version of the LabOne installation package for your operating system and platform have been downloaded from the Zurich Instruments downloads page http www zhinst com downloads login required m LabOneLinux lt arch gt lt release gt lt revision gt tar gz for example LabOneLinux32 64 XX XX XXXXX tar gz UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 16 1 4
256. tarted by service C Windows Temp ziServerLog m started manually C Users USER AppData Local Temp ziServerLog ziControl HF2 Instrument C Users USER Documents LabVIEW Data and the file name is called com zhinst ziControlStatusLog txt On Windows XP LabOne Data Server UHF C Documents and Settings USER Local Settings Temp Zurich Instruments LabOne ziDataServerLog m LabOne Web Server UHF C Documents and Settings USER Local Settings Temp Zurich Instruments LabOne ziWebServerLog m ziServer HF2 Instrument m started by service C WINDOWS Temp ziServerLog m started manually C Documents and Settings USER Local Settings Temp ziServertliog UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 43 1 7 Troubleshooting ziControl HF2 Instrument C Documents and Settings USER Documents LabVIEW Data and the file name is called com zhinst ziControlStatusLog txt UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 44 Chapter 2 Functional Overview This chapter provides the overview of the features provided by the UHF Instrument The first section contains the description of the graphical overview and the hardware and software feature list The next section details the front panel and the back panel of the measurement instrument The following section provides product selection and ordering support UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 45 2 1 Features 2 1 Features Clock In
257. tations it consists of a phase detector a loop filter a controller and an oscillator AFM mode where the phase between drive and measured signal encodes the topography or the measured AFM variable see Also Atomic Force Microscope Proportional Integral Derivative Packet Loss loss of packets of data between the instruments and the host computer Reduced Instruction Set Computer Statistical measure of the magnitude of a varying quantity It is especially useful when variates are positive and negative e g sinusoids sawtooth Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 216 RT S Scalar Network Analyzer SNA SL Spectrum Analyzer SA SSH 7 TC TCP IP Thread Total Harmonic Distortion THD TIL U UHF UHS USB V VCO Vector Network Analyzer VNA XML UHF User Manual square waves For a sine wave the following relation holds between the amplitude and the RMS value Uprms Upp V2 Upk 1 41 The RMS is also called quadratic mean Real time Instrument that measures the voltage of an analog input signal providing just the amplitude gain information See Also Spectrum Analyzer Vector Network Analyzer Sample Loss loss of samples between the instrument and the host computer Instrument that measures the voltage of an analog input signal providing just the amplitude gain information over a defined spectrum See Also Scalar Network Analyzer Secure Shell Time Constant Transmis
258. tead of Volts ON AC coupling Defines the input coupling for the Signal Inputs OFF DC coupling AC coupling inserts a high pass filter ON 500 Sets the matching impedance for the signal OFF 1MQ inputs Mode The user setting defines the oscillator frequency PEL The UHF PID option controls the oscillator frequency The UHF PID option controls the oscillator frequency ExtRef An external reference is mapped onto the oscillator frequency Frequency Hz O to 600 MHz Frequency control for each oscillator Locked ON OFF Oscillator locked to external reference when turned on Mode Demod Default operating mode with demodulator used for lock in demodulation ExtRef The demodulator is used for external reference mode and tracks the frequency of the selected reference input The demodulator is used in PLL mode for frequency tracking of the signal Note this function requires the UHF PID option to be installed and active on your instrument The demodulator is used by the UHF MOD option e g for the direct demodulation of carrier and sideband signals Osc oscillator index Connects the selected oscillator with the demodulator corresponding to this line Number of available oscillators depends on the installed options UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 107 4 2 Lock in Tab Harm 110 1023 Multiplies the demodulator s reference frequency with the integer factor defined by this field Demod Freq Hz
259. ter Show all available nodes UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 101 4 1 User Interface Overview Show all streaming nodes Show arithmetic unit streaming nodes All All Select all nodes that can be selected in the relevant context Vertical Axis Groups Vertical Axis groups are available in the Plotter tab SW Trigger tab and Sweeper tab These tools are able to show signals with different axis properties within the same plot As a frequency and amplitude axis have fundamentally different limits they have each their individual axis which allows for correct auto scaling However signals of the same type e g Cartesian demodulator results should preferably share one scaling This allows for fast signal strength comparison To achieve this the signals are assigned to specific axis group Each axis group has its own axis system This default behavior can be changed by moving one or more signals into a new group The tick labels of only one axis group can be shown at once This is the foreground axis group To define the foreground group click on one of the group names in the Vertical Axis Groups box The current foreground group gets a high contrast color Select foreground group Click on a signal name or group name inside the Vertical Axis Groups If a group is empty the selection is not performed Split the default vertical axis group Use drag amp drop to move one signal on the field Drop signal here to add a new
260. ters are subject to drift This may provoke inaccurate measurements Zurich Instruments recommends to re calibrate the Instrument every 2 years The Instrument measurements are unpredictable please monitor the status tabs if any of the warning is occurring or has occurred in the past The Instrument does not generate any output signal verify that signal output switch has been activated the related control panel The Instrument locks poorly using the digital I O as reference make sure that the digital input signal has a high slew rate and clean level crossings The Instrument locks poorly using the auxiliary analog inputs as reference the input signal amplitude might be too small Use proper gain setting of the input channel UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 42 1 7 Troubleshooting 1 7 2 The sample stream from the Instrument to the host computer is not continuous check the sample loss and the packet loss flags The sample loss flag indicates occasional sample loss due to sampling rate set to high the instruments sends more samples than the interface and the host computer can absorb Reduce the sample rate settings The packet loss indicates an important failure of the communications to the host computer and compromises the behavior of the instrument Reduce the sample rate settings The Instrument is connected but no communication to the computer is happening check the clock fail flag This abnormal situation needs
261. the LabOne session has been started and the desired UI setup has been established If a default_ui setting file exists pressing the button Default UI loads it instead of UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 28 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument the factory default To use factory defaults again the default_ui file must be removed from the user setting directory Note The user setting files are saved to an application specific folder in the user directory structure On Windows the folder can be opened in a file explorer by following the link in the Windows Start Menu Click and select Start Menu gt Programs gt Zurich Instruments gt LabOne Servers gt Settings Note Double clicking on a device row in the Available Devices block is a quick way of starting the default LabOne UI This action is equal to selecting the desired device and pressing the Default UI button Double clicking on a row in the Saved Settings block is a quick way of loading the LabOne UI with the those device and UI settings This action is equal to selecting the desired settings file and pressing the Device amp UI button 1 5 3 Device Connectivity There are several ways to connect to the Zurich Instruments lock in amplifier from a host computer The device can either be connected by Universal Serial Bus USB or by Ethernet The USB connection is a point to point connection between the device and the PC on which the Data server runs Th
262. the rate field is greyed out and has no meaning Note some UHF Instruments feature Trigger 1 2 on the back panel instead of Trigger 3 4 Trig Mode Rising Selects triggered sample acquisition mode on rising edge of the selected Trigger input Falling Selects triggered sample acquisition mode on falling edge of the selected Trigger input Both Selects triggered sample acquisition mode on both edges of the selected Trigger input High Selects continuous sample acquisition mode on high level of the selected Trigger input In this selection the sample rate field determines the frequency in which demodulated samples are sent to the host computer Low Selects continuous sample acquisition mode on low level of the selected Trigger input In this selection the sample rate field determines the frequency in which demodulated samples are sent to the host computer Amplitude Unit Vok Vrms dBm Select the unit of the displayed amplitude value The dBm value is only valid for a system with 50 Q termination Amp Enable JNZORF Enables each individual output signal amplitude It is possible to generate signals being the linear combination of the available demodulator frequencies Amp V range to range Defines the output amplitude for each demodulator frequency as rms or peak to peak value UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 118 4 3 Lock in MF Tab A negative amplitude value is equivalent to a phase change of 180 de
263. the two representations also when the scope is not acquiring data The Y axis displays the selected signal that can be modified and scaled using the arbitrary input unit feature of the Lock in tab The Scope can display a signal sampled at up to 1 8 GSa s selected from one out of 8 possible sources The Scope is particular attractive if one wants to analyze raw samples at the signal inputs auxiliary inputs or trigger connectors For many applications this means that an additional standalone oscilloscope is not needed Therefore the UHF Instrument helos save valuable laboratory space and simplifies the user s setup The product of the inverse sampling rate and the number of acquired points Length directly determines the total recording time for each shot Hence longer time intervals can be captured by reducing the sample rate The Scope can perform sample rate reduction either using decimation or BW Limitation as illustrated in Figure 4 11 BW Limitation is activated by default but it can be deactivated on a per channel basis on the Advanced sub tab The figure shows an example of an input signal at the top followed by the Scope output when the highest sample rate of 1 8 GSa s equal to 1 8 GHz is used The next signal shows the Scope output when a rate reduction by a factor of 4 i e 450 MSa s is configured and the rate reduction method of decimation is used For decimation a rate reduction by a factor of N is performed by only keeping every Nt
264. thmetic unit Each unit operates independently and can be considered always ON hence the defined operation is calculated all the time and the result is available to be used elsewhere in the system Moreover when streaming is enabled the results can be transfered to the host computer observed in the user interface and stored to disk A wide selection of input parameters including demodulator outputs and auxiliary inputs can be taken as operands UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 151 4 10 Arithmetic Unit Tab Scope x Numeric xX Arithmetic Unit x Add Row x AU Cartesian 1 AU Cartesian 2 AU Polar 1 AU Polar 2 Mode En Rate Sa s Mode En Rate Sa s Mode En Rate Sa s Mode En Rate Sa s Divide v 6 866k Add v 1 717k Add v 1 717k Add v 1 717k Signal Coeff Scale Unit Signal Coeff Scale Unit Signal Coeff Scale Unit Signal Coeff Scale Unit DemodX v 1 vx1l y x 1 000 C2 DemodX wv 1 y x1 y x 1 000 P1 DemodR wv 1 y x1 y x 1 000 P2 DemodO wv 1 y x1 v x 1 000 DemodX v 1 v x1 v x 1 000 DemodX v 1 v x1l y x 1 000 DemodR wv 1 v x1 y x 1 000 Demod v 1 v x1 v x 1 000 1 000 Overflow 1 582u v Overflow 1 765u V Overflow 229 183 deg Overflow Figure 4 18 LabOne UI Arithmetic unit tab In total there are four units two for Cartesian operations and two for polar operations Each unit produces a scalar output along with a unit both indicated in the last line The Cartesian units can either add multiply or divide two
265. thods ideally no piece of signal information is lost during the data reduction but huge parts if the initial signal are discarded that contain no or a negligible piece of relevant information The operation of the lock in amplifier can most easily be understood considering the inputs signal in the frequency domain where the lock in acts as a sophisticated bandpass filter with adjustable center frequency and bandwidth if we generously ignore phase sensitivity here for the sake of simplicity In contrast the Boxcar does a very similar thing in the time domain where it allows to cut out only the signal components that contain information Avery common use case are experiments with pulsed lasers In particular when duty cycles are low the fraction of the time domain signal where there is actual information can be quite small and so the idea is to record only the parts when for instance the laser is on In classical analog instruments this is typically realized by a switch that can by triggered externally and a subsequent integrator Most often the trigger functionality also allows to configure atime delay and acertain window for as long as the switch shall open up for each trigger and the signal will be integrated The signal output from the integrator is then passed through an adjustable low pass filter for further noise reduction One of the biggest limitations of analog boxcar instruments is their trigger re arm time caused by the finite time require
266. tional Sinc Filter can be enabled It attenuates those unwanted harmonic components in the demodulator output The Sinc Filter is also useful when measuring at low frequencies since it allows to apply a Low UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 105 4 2 Lock in Tab Pass Filter bandwidth closer to the demodulation frequency thus speeding up the measurement time Each demodulator is activated by the En button in the Data Transfer section where also the sampling rate Rate for each demodulator can be defined The Trigger section next to the Data Transfer allows for setting trigger conditions in order to control and initiate data transfer from the Instrument to the host PC by the application of logic signals e g TTL to either Trigger Input 3 or 4 on the back panel In the Signal Outputs section the On buttons allow to activate each of the Signal Outputs For Instruments with no UHF MF option installed this is also the place where the output amplitudes for each of the Signal Outputs can be set in adjustable units The Range drop down list is used to select the proper output range setting On each Signal Output a digital offset voltage Offset can be defined The maximum output signal permitted is 1 5 V The block diagram displayed in Figure 4 6 indicates the main demodulator components and their interconnection The understanding of the wiring is essential for successfully operating the instrument Demodulator Oscillators
267. to get going For manual configuration of a new control loop it is generally recommended to start with a small value for P and set the other parameters l D D Limit to zero at first By enabling the controller one will then immediately see if the sign was estimated correctly and the feedback is provided to the correct output parameter for instance by checking the numbers Error Shift Out given directly in the PID tab A slow increase of will then help to zero the PID error signal completely once the bandwidth is high enough Great care is usually required when enabling the D part as this often introduces an instable servo behavior which sometime can be mitigated by activating the associated low pass filter At this stage a Plotter tab opened in parallel and displaying the PID error over time can be a great help The math tools offered by the Plotter allows to display the standard deviation and the mean of the error These values should be minimized by tweaking the PID parameters and the associated histogram should have a symmetric ideally Gaussian envelope After a few iterations one can then check the performance by introducing a step response by changing the PID setpoint slightly The SW Trigger is the ideal tool to record the step function trace of the PID input value by setting the trigger condition half way of the step and the Delay and Duration according to the expected bandwidth One should also make sure that the data rate set for the transfe
268. to 1 e SGL Persistence ON OFF Keeps previous scope shots in the display The color scheme visualizes the number of occurrences at certain positions in time and amplitude by a multi color scheme ON OFF Shows the histogram in the display For the Vertical Axis Groups please see Table 4 9 in the section called Vertical Axis Groups Table 4 22 Scope tab Trigger sub tab srey green yellow When flashing indicates that new scope shots are being captured and displayed in the plot area The Trigger must not necessarily be enabled for this indicator to flash A disabled trigger is equivalent to continuous acquisition Scope shots with data loss are indicated by yellow Such an invalid scope shot is not processed Trigger based scope shot acquisition Continuous scope shot acquisition Signal Inputs Trigger Inputs Auxiliary Inputs Demodulator Oscillator Phase Demodulator X Y R Theta PID Boxcar AU ON OFF Edge Rise Edge Fall Level V ON OFF trigger signal range negative values permitted Hysteresis Mode Hysteresis V UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments Selects the trigger source signal Navigate through the tree view that appears and click on the required signal Performs a trigger event when the source signal crosses the trigger level from low to high For dual edge triggering select also the falling edge Performs a trigger event when the source signal cr
269. tput Instrument Output End point is at the instrument output DUT Output End point is at the DUT output and instrument input UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 175 Response In 4 16 PID Tab Demod Input End point is at the demodulator input PID Error End point is at the PID error calculation of the PID Closed Loop ON OFF Switch the display of the system response between closed or open loop Target BW Hz numeric value Target bandwidth for the closed loop feedback system which is used for the advising of the PID parameters This bandwidth defines the trade off between PID speed and noise Adjusts the demodulator bandwidth to fit best to the specified target bandwidth of the full system Auto Bandwidth ON OFF If disabled a demodulator bandwidth too close to the target bandwidth may cause overshoot and instability In special cases the demodulator bandwidth can also be selected smaller than the target bandwidth Only optimize the proportional gain Only optimize the integral gain Only optimize the proportional and the integral gain Optimize the proportional integral and differential gains Optimize the proportional integral and differential gains Also the differential gain bandwidth will be optimized Advise Mode PIDF Calculate the PID coefficients based on the used DUT model and the given target bandwidth If optimized values can be found the coefficients are updated a
270. trument immediately to sparks prevent large damage UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 12 1 4 Software Installation 1 4 Software Installation The UHF Instrument is controlled entirely by a host computer that requires the software LabOne For the software installation administrator rights are required to run the instrument a regular user account is sufficient Note It may also be necessary to perform a firmware upgrade on your UHF Instrument necessary if performing a software update see Section 1 6 1 4 1 Windows Installation The installation packages for the Zurich Instruments software are available as Windows installer msi packages The software is available on the Zurich Instruments download portal at http www zhinst com downloads Proceed in the following order for installation 1 Login on the website using the login and password provided by Zurich Instruments 2 Download the software package suitable to your operating system and processor architecture 32 bit or 64 bit Important When downloading the software packages please make sure that you download and install the software that is suited to the addressing mode 32 bit x86 64 bit x64 of your operating system Zurich Instruments supports Microsoft Windows XP Windows 7 and Windows 8 for both 32 bit and 64 bit processors In case you are not sure which Windows architecture you are using you can check that as follows m Windows 7 C
271. truments 74 3 4 Tutorial Phase locked Loop In this case we must also select the 8 oscillator and demodulator 8 for the phase locked loop operation Now we need to set up the closed loop response of the PLL One can use the PLL Advisor for such purpose For this tutorial we will not use Advanced Mode but rather will just set the Target BW Hz to be 1 0k One then needs to press on the Advise button to see the simulated open loop response This will also generate a set of PID parameters as shown in the screen shot below One can observe that the 3dB point is roughly at 1kHz as specified Once you are happy with the response then simply press on the ToPLL button to copy the PID parameters back to the PLL 2 setting To start the PLL operation simply click on the Enable button This will launch the phase locked loop operation 1 PLL2 PLL Advisor 2 ieee g E I 10 0573KH PLL Settings 2 EH A 10 OST 3k Oscillator 8 Advanced Mode lt kariri Center Freq Hz 2 1505770M Application Open Loop v aa a a hes i 101V L Upper Limit Hz 15 00k Target BW Hz 10 00k E Lower Limit Hz 15 00k Lin Demodulator Advise Demodulator 8 v Demod BW Hz 17 36k Demod BW Hz 17 37k F Order 1 x Order 1 X g PID Settings Setpoint Ep 4 7000 isa E 1 000082 A 0 0000fHz deg P Hz deg 114 6 P Hz deg 114 6 E Odeg Hz deg s 17 75k Hz deg s 17 75k D Hz deg s 0 000 D Hz deg s 0 000 Rate Hz 3 5M Rate Hz 3 5M Error
272. ulfilled using marginal stable PID settings In this case try to lower the bandwidth or optimize the loop delays of the PID system PM deg numeric value Simulated phase margin of the PID with the current settings The phase margin should be greater than 60 deg for stable conditions An Infinite value is shown if no unity gain crossing is available to determine a phase margin Stable LED gsreen red Green indicates that the phase margin is fulfilled and the PID system should be stable DUT numeric value Parameter that specifies the DUT property This parameter will influence the DUT model used for the advise To PID Copy the PID Advisor settings to the PID UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 177 AAS PEG Lap 4 17 PLL Tab The PLL tab allows convenient setup of a phase locked loop using one of the demodulators as phase detector and one of the PID controllers to provide feedback to an internal oscillator This tab is only available when the UHF PID PLL controller option is installed on the UHF Instrument see Information section in the Device tab Note Demodulator and PID parameters that are used within an active PLL are set to read only values on the Lock in tab and PID tab 4 1 7 1 Features wo fully programmable 600 MHz phased locked loops m Programmable PLL center frequency and phase set point m Programmable PLL phase detector filter settings and PID controller parameters m PLL Advisor for model based
273. ultaneously and the user can have displays on multiple computer screens Parallel to the UI the Instrument can be fully controlled and read out possibly concurrently by custom programs written in any of the supported languages e g LabVIEW MATLAB C etc connecting through the LabOne APIs unit 1 unit 2 tab bar collapse expand Config Xx Device XxX Aux X Lock n x Ogcillators Demodulators Signal Outputs ar ae Refererjce Frequencies Input Low Pass Filters Data Transfer es ode Frequency Hz Mode Osc Harm Demod Freq Hz 3 Signal Order BW 3 dB Sinc EE En Rate sas ER 2 Output 1 m E 1 Manual 10 00000000M 1 Demod v 1 v 1 10 00000000M q Siginl v 3 100 1 1 717k E On 500 a v ie 2 Manual 10 00000000M 2 Demod vy 1 7 1 10 00000000M Sigin1 v 3 100 1 1 717k Range 15V v 7 viv 1 10 00000000M Siginl v 3 100 1 1 717k i Offset V 0 000 1 1 10 00000000M Siginl v 3 100 1 i 1 717k j Amp Vpk 100 0m Input 2 J i Output 2 Range 1 0 a 5 Demod 2 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 i 1 717k On 500 BJ Scaling 1 vive 6 Demod 27 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 3 100 1 i 1 717k i Range 15V AC 509 iA 7 Demod 2 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 i 1 717k Offset V 0 000 m 2v 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 d 1 717k Amp Vpk 100 0m Scope Chi Wav Scope Ch2 Wave Horizontal Mode Time Domain Wave mV Sampling Rate 1 80 GHz Length pts
274. und in the LabOne release notes Revision 23144 22 Apr 2014 Document overhaul and extension compliant to 14 02 product release Updates include the getting started chapter the ordering guide added new tutorials and updated the functional description As of this release the LabOne software contains installation files for both HF2 Series and UHF Series products Also as of this release programming of the device by one of the supported APIS is described in a separated UHF Programmer s Manual Detailed changes and additions to the UHFLI product Full support for UHF 10G Optical Ethernet option Boxcar option support for baseline suppression PID option added phase unwrap feature Periodic waveform analyzer PWA increased number of bins to 1024 Periodic waveform analyzer PWA higher update rate UDP port assignment per device starting from port 8013 Ethernet improved reconnect after cable disconnect Start up screen with device and setting selection added support of multiple devices per server Improved Device connect disconnect without server restart User interface added cursor Math with copy amp paste of values User interface added relative cursor Lock in Vok Vrms dBm support CSV transfer to other applications Excel via LiveLink Added histogram to oscilloscope Sweeper Unbiased standard deviation Sweeper Speed increase down to 6Ms per sweep point Plotter Support for PID and boxcar streaming data Detailed
275. upon exit Figure 1 21 1OGbE IP configuration The 10GbE network connection to the device creates high CPU load on the PC due to the high bandwidth of measurement data It is thus essential that the network card is configured so that CPU load is optimized The setting with highest impact is the enabling of Jumbo frames Since the processor processes larger packages the interrupt load will decrease Therefore the 10GbE UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 36 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument should always be used with Jumbo frames enabled As the network is a P2P connection there is no side effect on other network devices Profile Settings Value Interupt Moderation 9014 Bytes WO a Large Send Offload IPv4 Large Send Offload IPv6 Locally Administered Address Log Link State Event Perfomance Options Pronty amp VLAN Jumbo Packet Enables Jumbo Packet capability for TCP IP packets In situations where large packets make up the majority of traffic and additional latency can be tolerated Jumbo Packets can reduce CPU utilization and improve wire efficiency S Jumbo Packets are larger than standard Ethernet frames which are approximately 1 5k in size iE Note Changing this setting may cause a momentary 2 loss of connectivity Figure 1 22 Advanced 10GbE network card configuration The following settings should be configured on the advanced 10GbE network card m Interrupt Moderati
276. ut UHF Box option needs to be installed AU Cartesian Select one of the two Arithmetic Cartesian units for auxiliary output AU Pola Select one of the two Arithmetic Polar units for auxiliary output Manual Manually define an auxiliary output voltage using the offset field Channel index elect the channel according to the selected a source Preoffset numerical value Add an pre offset to the signal before scaling in signal units is applied Auxiliary Output Value Signal Preoffset Scale Offset Auto zero Automatically adjusts the Pre offset to set the Auxiliary Output Value to zero Scaling numerical Multiplication factor to scale the signal Auxiliary Output Value Signal Preoffset Scale Offset Offset numerical Add the specified offset voltage to the signal value In Volts after scaling Auxiliary Output Value Signal Preoffset Scale Offset Auto zero Dd Automatically adjusts the Offset to set the Auxiliary Output Value to zero UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 155 4 11 Auxiliary Tab Lower Limit 10V to 10 V7 Lower limit for the signal at the Auxiliary Output A smaller value will be clipped Upper Limit LO LON Ory Upper limit for the signal at the Auxiliary Output A larger value will be clipped Value SON LOO Voltage present on the Auxiliary Output Auxiliary Output Value Signal Preoffset Scale Offset UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 156 4 12 nputs Outputs Tab 4 1
277. ut channels are Identical in all aspects Config x Device XxX Aux X Lock in x AddRow x Signal Inputs Oscillators Demodulators Signal Outputs E ce Reference Frequencies Input Low Pass Filters Data Transfer E eee Input 1 a0 Mode Frequency Hz Mode Osc Harm Demod Freq Hz o Signal Order BW 3 dB sinc ER En Rate sas Z 8 Output 1 Range 100 0m 0 1 Manual 10 00000000M 1 Demod v iv 1 10 00000000M i Siginl v 3 v 100 1 fe 1 717k Z On 500 fe Scaling 1 viv oo 2 Manual 10 00000000M 2 Demod wv iv 1 10 00000000M Siginl v 3 100 1 1 717k i Range 15V v AC 509 g a 3 Manual 10 00000000M 3 Demod v iv 1 10 00000000M Sigin v 3 100 1 i 1 717k d Offset V 0 000 Hus 4 Manual 10 00000000M 4 Demod v 17 1 10 00000000M SigiInl v 3 100 1 1 717k Input 2 pt 5 Manual 10 00000000M 5 Demod v 2 v 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 1 717k 0 Output 2 Range 1 0 eal 6 Manual 10 00000000M 6 Demod v 2 1 10 00000000M Sigin2 v 3 100 1 KO 1 717k On 500 J Scaling 1 viv 7 Manual 10 00000000M 7 Demod v 2v 1 10 00000000M SigiIn2 v 3 100 1 1 717k Range 15V v AC 500 Eis 8 Manual 10 00000000M 8 Demod r 2 1 10 00000000M SigIn2 v 3 100 1 fe d 1 717k a Offset V 0 000 Figure 4 7 LabOne User Interface Lock in MF tab From left to right the tab is organized in the following sections the Signal Inputs section allows the user to define all relevant settings specific to the signal entered as for example input couplin
278. ution aa l the required signal Note Channel 2 requires the UHF DIG option Min Max numeric val Upper limit of the scope full scale range For demodulator PID Boxcar and AU signals the limit should be adjusted so that the signal covers the specified range to achieve optimal resolution Enable ON Z OFF Activates the display of the corresponding scope channel Note Channel 2 requires the UHF DIG option BW Limit Ch 1 ON Selects sample averaging for sample rates lower than the maximal available sampling rate OFF Selects sample decimation for sample rates lower than the maximal available sampling rate BW Limit Ch 2 ON Selects sample averaging for sample rates lower than the maximal available sampling rate OFF Selects sample decimation for sample rates lower than the maximal available sampling rate Power ON OFF Calculate and show the power value To extract power spectral density PSD this button should be enabled together with Spectral Density Spectral Density UN AORF Calculate and show the spectral density If power is enabled the power spectral density value UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments LZ 4 6 Scope Tab is calculated The spectral density is used to analyze noise Avg Filter None Averaging is turned off Exponential Consecutive scope shots are averaged with an Moving Avg o exponential weight Adjusts the averaging weight function A value of n sets the weight of the n th shot
279. ve ON OFF When on the corresponding 8 bit bus is in output mode When off it is in input mode Format DIO view format is hexadecimal DIO view format is binary Clock Internal56 MHz The DIO is internally clocked with a fixed frequency of 56 25 MHz Clk Pin 68 The DIO is externally clocked with a clock signal connected to DIO Pin 68 Available frequency range 1 Hz to 60 MHz Trigger level o Lona v Trigger voltage level at which the trigger input toggles between low and high Use 50 amplitude for digital input and consider 100 mV hysteresis 50 O 50 O 1kO Trigger input impedance When on the trigger input impedance is 50 Q when off 1 kQ Trigger Input status A high state has been triggered A low state has been triggered toggling The trigger signalis toggling Trigger output signal The output trigger is disabled Osc Phase Demod 4 Trigger event is output for each zero crossing of the oscillator phase used on demodulator 4 Osc Phase Demod 8 Trigger event is output for each zero crossing of the oscillator phase used on demodulator 8 UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 159 4 13 DIO Tab Scope rigger Trigger output is asserted when the scope trigger condition is satisfied Scope Trigger Trigger output is deasserted when the scope trigger condition is satisfied scope Armed Trigger output is asserted when the scope is waiting for the trigger condition to become satisfied Scope Armed Tri
280. ven by the instrument lt a Output 2 single ended UHF output Signal Output 2 this blue LED indicates that the signal output is actively driven by ON the instrument Ref Trigger 1 analog reference Input TTL reference output or bidirectional digital TTL trigger Ref Trigger 2 analog reference input TTL reference output or bidirectional digital TTL trigger K Aux Output 1 this connector provides an user defined signal often used to output demodulated samples X Y or R L Aux Output 2 this connector provides an user defined signal often used to output demodulated samples X Y or R O M Aux Output 3 this connector provides an user defined signal often used to output demodulated samples X Y or R Aux Output 4 this connector provides an user defined signal often used to output demodulated samples X Y or R this LED indicates that the instrument is powered color blue the device has an active connection over USB or Ethernet UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 49 2 2 Front Panel Tour color orange indicates ready to connect The device is ready for connection over USB or Ethernet The internal auto calibration process is also indicated by an orange LED color orange blinking device is in startup mode and waiting for an IP address As long as the device does not have a dynamic IP address or does use its static default address a connection attempt over Ethernet will fail UHF User Manual Rev
281. ver As a consequence the device cannot be accessed by the specified interface To access the device a disconnect is needed Connected The device is connected to the LabOne Data Server that the user is connected to The user can start a session to work with that device Device needs FW The firmware of the device is out of date Please first upgrade the upgrade firmware See Section 1 6 Upgrading the Lock In Amplifier Firmware UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments L4 1 5 Connecting to the UHF Instrument Device not yet ready The device is visible and starting up When the device is ready it will be flagged as free Messages The LabOne Web Server will show additional messages in case of a missing component or a failure condition These messages display information about the failure condition The following paragraphs list these messages and give more information on the user actions needed to resolve the problem Lost Connection to the LabOne Web Server In this case the browser is no longer able to connect to the LabOne Web Server This can happen if the Web Server and Data Server run on different PCs and a network connection is interrupted As long as the Web Server is running and the session did not yet time out it is possible to just attach to the existing session and continue Thus within about 15 seconds it is possible with Retry to recover the old session connection The Reload button opens the dialog Device and
282. ver time In cases where the amplitude of the resonator signal needs to be stabilized with a second control loop the Resonator Amplitude model is the right choice Setting the resonance frequency and the Q factor both can be obtained before by a frequency scan over the resonance using the sweeper module allows the Advisor to estimate the gain and low pass behavior of the resonator Internal PLL is used whenever an external oscillating signal is provided that shall be followed by one of the internal oscillators The VCO setting describes a situation where the input variable of the DUT is a voltage and the output is a frequency The gain is then the conversion factor of how much voltage change on the input causes how much frequency shift on the VCO output In case the frequency of the VCO can be tracked by using the external reference mode one can easily obtain this gain with the sweeper by scanning the Auxiliary Output voltage and displaying the resulting oscillator frequency The gain is given by the slope of the resulting line at the frequency of interest With a suitable model chosen and the proper parameter set to best describe the actual measurement situation one can now continue by defining a target bandwidth for the entire control loop and the Advise Mode i e the parameters that shall be used for the control operation Whenever the input signal is derived from one of the demodulators it is convenient to activate the box next to target bandwidth
283. w to extract the envelope of an amplitude modulated carrier in the Out PWA tool from the boxcar averager More generally the multi channel boxcar feature serves to measure signals that are modulated with two time bases the fast time base produces the pulses as measured by the boxcar averager and the slow time base corresponds to a change of the envelope Atypical application would be an amplitude modulated narrow laser pulse waveform To perform this tutorial an external arbitrary waveform generator with an external AM modulation capability is required In this section you will learn how to measure a narrow pulse waveform that is amplitude modulated Both the boxcar averager and the output PWA tools will be utilised in this example First one needs to generate a test signal Preparation Connect the cables as illustrated below Make sure the UHFLI is powered on and then connect the UHFLI through the USB to your PC or to your local area network LAN where the host computer resides After starting LabOne the default web browser opens with the LabOne graphical user interface U Lock in Amplifier 600 MHz 1 8 GSa s Front Panel Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Aux Output 1 2 3 4 Out Sync Mod AWG Figure 3 37 UHF connections to an external arbitrary wave generator The tutorial can be started with the default instrument configuration e g after a power cycle and the default user interface settings e g as is aft
284. ws Update Home Install Updates 16 Select by Type High Priority 16 Software Optional 8 Hardware Optional 5 Options Review your update history Get help and support Use administrator options our F AutoFill P a Pager Safety Tools e He Microsoft Update curity or performance but they can impr Select Optional Software Updates computer s se ove how some features programs or devices work To help puter make sure you install all high priority updates Review and install updates Optional software updates Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft NET Fi Microsoft NET Frameworl k versi Update for Root Certificates October 2010 KB931125 4 Update for Internet Explorer 8 Compatibility View List for Windows XP KB2362765 k 4 Client Profile for Windows XP x86 KB982670 Windows PowerShell 2 0 and WinRM 2 0 for Windows XP and Windows Embedded KB968930 Microsoft Base Smart Card Cryptographic Service Provider Package x86 KB909520 OE Windows Search 4 0 for Windows XP KB940157 ion 1 1 Windows Update Privacy Statement 2010 Microsoft Corporation All rights reservi Figure 1 1 ed Terms of Use Trademarks Privacy Statement Total 16 updates 45 9 MB 4 minutes Installation of NET Framework Windows LabOne Installation 1 The UHF Instrument should not be connected to your comput
285. xcar sub tab ON OFF Enable the BOXCAR unit Input Signal Select Signal Input used for the boxcar analysis Osc oscillator index Selection of the oscillator used for the boxcar analysis Frequency Hz frequency value Oscillator frequency used for the boxcar analysis Too high frequency grey red Frequency for the boxcar is above or equal 450MHz Sticky flag cleared by restarting the boxcar The boxcar output may not be reliable any more Copy from cursors eaiaeuketicer Take cursor values to define Window Start and Window span values Start Mode Start deg Native definition of the boxcar averaging gate start as phase Start s Definition of the boxcar averaging gate start as time Due to the conversion to phase on the device asmall uncertainty window exists Start deg 0 to 360 Boxcar averaging gate opening start in degrees It can be converted to time assuming 360 equals to a full period of the driving oscillator Start Time s O to period Boxcar averaging gate opening start in seconds based on one oscillator frequency period equals 360 degrees Width Mode Width deg Definition of the averaging gate width as phase Width s Native definition of the averaging gate width as time Width pts Definition of the averaging gate width in samples UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 191 4 19 Boxcar Tab Width 0 to 360 Boxcar averaging gate opening width in degrees based on one oscillator frequ
286. y are collapsed by default It takes one mouse click icon in order to expand UHF User Manual Revision 28900 Zurich Instruments 104 4 2 Lock in Tab those controls On the right hand side of the Lock in tab the Signal Outputs section allows to define signal amplitudes offsets and range values The Scaling field below the Range field can be used to multiply the Signal Inout data to account for the gain of an external amplifier In case there is a gain of 10 applied to the input signal externally then the Scaling field can be set to 0 1 to compensate for it There are two buttons below the Scaling field that can be toggled the AC DC button and the 50 Q 1 MQ The AC DC button sets the coupling type AC coupling has a high pass cutoff frequency that can be used to block large DC signal components to prevent input signal saturation during amplification The 50 0 1 MQ button toggles the input impedance between low 50 Q and high approx 1 MQ input impedance 50 Q input impedance should be selected for signal frequencies above 10 MHz to avoid artifacts generated by multiple signal reflections within the cable With 50 Q input impedance one will expect a reduction of a factor of 2 in the measured signal if the signal source also has an output impedance of 50 Q To the right of the Signal Inputs section one finds the Oscillators section which has two entries The Mode column indicates whether the oscillators frequency is fixed to a value entered
287. y input and auxiliary output signals as demodulator inputs Lock in output amplitude setting in Vand dBm Lock in Support for edge and level triggers Lock in phase to zero adjustment PID simultaneous operation of all 4 controllers at a rate of 14 MSa s PLL center point adjustment Plotter multi trace Support and vertical axis groups Plotter quick add trace feature Sweeper additional sweep parameters Sweeper much higher sweep speed and support for odd configurations Spectrum new name of former ZOOMFFT panel Spectrum filter compensation and absolute frequency control Spectrum windowing effect reduction Spectrum calculation of spectral density and power on FFT spectrum Numeric increase font size of numerical values SW Trigger triggering on Ref Trigger connectors SW Trigger automatic trigger level adjustment SW Trigger triggering on Ref Trigger connectors Auxiliary automatic adjustment of Preoffset and Offset to zero outputs Config improved data streaming and unified directory to CSV and MATLAB API Programming LabVIEW 64 bit support API Programming timestamp support for some data types API revision 4 Revision 18265 30 Jul 2013 Large revision of the specification chapter compliant to 13 06 product release Moved many parameters from minimum maximum to typical when parameter is characterized but not specifically tested during production Also updated the getting started section With 13 06 all tooltip
288. y multiple signal reflections within the cable With 50 Q input impedance one will expect a reduction of a factor of 2 in the measured signal if the signal source also has an output impedance of 50 Q To the right of the Signal Inputs section one finds the Oscillators section which has two entries The Mode column indicates whether the oscillators frequency is fixed to a value entered by the user Manual or if another instrument resource determines the frequency e g ExtRef PLL In such cases the associated frequency field will be greyed out In internal reference mode a demodulator operates at the ideal internally generated frequency and provides the best possible demodulation For external reference mode it is required to internally recover the demodulation frequency with a high quality PLL A green light right next to the frequency will then indicate Smooth operation The next section contains the Demodulators settings In total there are 8 lines each representing one demodulator The Mode column is read only for all demodulators except 4 and 8 which can be to set to either internal reference Demod or external reference mode ExtRef When internal reference mode is selected it is possible to use demodulate the input signal with 4 demodulators simultaneously using different filter settings or at different harmonic frequencies of the reference frequency For external reference mode one demodulator is used for the reference recovery and a f
289. z 1 8 GSa s Signal Input Signal Output Ref Trigger Aux Output Lan Clock USB Trigger Out Trigger In Aux In ZCtrl 1 1 00 O 8 000 000 0 0000 000 Front Panel Back Panel BNC Figure 3 12 Referencing to a TTL signal using Ref Trigger Input 1 When using the Ref Trigger Inputs one needs to be aware that they are comparator based digital channels where the input coupling can be selected to be either 500 or 1 kQ in the Ref Trigger section inthe DIO tab Moreover a suitable Trigger threshold can be defined by adjusting the Input Level definitions Note It is important to know that the trigger to discriminate the two logical states operates on positive slopes with a hysteresis of about 100 mV As a consequence a peak to peak signal amplitude of minimum 200 mV should be provided as a external reference signal to guarantee reliable operation Note For signal frequencies larger than 10 MHz using 50Q input coupling is strongly recommended to avoid signal reflections in the cable that can lead to false events or measurement artefacts The default settings are chosen such that a standard 3 3 V TTL signal can be directly attached without further adjustments The following DIO settings are used for this example Table 3 12 Settings acquire the reference signal DO Ref Trigger Input Level 2950 mV When the signalis applied and a proper discrimination threshold chosen both control LEDs are lid to indicate that the ch

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

(MPOC) et - Centre hospitalier affilié universitaire de Québec    TDSHーBA 東芝電球ペンダン ト取扱説明書 保管用        取り扱い上の注意 安全上のご注意 主な仕様 アフターサービス  Digital Music Player    全自動血圧計 取扱説明書  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file